Bay Controller - Stucke Elektronik - SYMAP - Service Manual 795

7/25/2019 Bay Controller - Stucke Elektronik - SYMAP - Service Manual 795

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bay-controller-stucke-elektronik-symap-service-manual-795 1/208

Service Manual

- Power Protection- Monitoring- Diesel Control- Power Management

SYMAP



Service Manual

- 2/208 - SYMAP_ServiceManual_E.doc SYMAP®

FOR THIS DOCUMENT WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS.WITHOUT OUR CONSENT IN WRITING IT SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCEDBY ANY MEANS NOR BE MADE ACCESSIBLE TO THIRD PARTIES.

ANY VIOLATION WILL BE SUBJECT TO CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.

THE CONTENT OF THIS MANUAL IS FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY.THE CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOTBE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY STUCKE ELEKTRONIK GMBH.

STUCKE ELEKTRONIK GMBH ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITYFOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS DOCUMENTATION.

Version: 08.12.2011 (JH)File: SYMAP_ServiceManual_E.doc

Firmware:- CU: 1.10 / 17.02.2009- MU: 1.10 / 02.09.2009- RU: 1.10 / 08.11.2006



Service Manual

SYMAP® SYMAP_ServiceManual_E.doc - 3/208 -

Table of content

1 Parameter settings introduction.............................................................................................. 5

1.1

Change of settings .......................................................................................................... 5

1.2 Event system introduction ............................................................................................... 5

1.3 Graphical Quick User Guide – e.g. SYMAP®-Y ............................................................... 6

2

System settings ...................................................................................................................... 11

2.1 Codes ........................................................................................................................... 12

2.2 General Parameter ....................................................................................................... 13

2.3 Nominal Ratio Values ................................................................................................... 20

2.4 Communication ............................................................................................................. 24

2.5 Analog Inputs ................................................................................................................ 29

2.5.1 PT100 Inputs ................................................................................................................ 32

2.6 Binary Inputs ................................................................................................................. 35

2.6.1 Wire fault alarm ............................................................................................................. 37

2.7 Analogous Outputs ....................................................................................................... 38

2.8 Binary Outputs .............................................................................................................. 41

2.8.1

Shunt #1 output ............................................................................................................ 41 2.8.2 Shunt #2 output ............................................................................................................ 42

2.8.3 Lockout relay ................................................................................................................ 43

2.8.4 Synchron ON output ..................................................................................................... 44

2.8.5 Function outputs ........................................................................................................... 45

2.9 Event Builder ................................................................................................................ 46

2.10 Power management (main menu) ................................................................................. 47

2.10.1 General PM Parameter ................................................................................................. 48

2.10.2 Power management ...................................................................................................... 55

2.10.3 Load sharing ................................................................................................................. 59

2.10.4 Frequency controller ..................................................................................................... 64

2.10.5 Voltage regulator .......................................................................................................... 68

2.10.6

Power factor controller .................................................................................................. 71

2.10.7 Big consumer request (BCR) ........................................................................................ 73

2.10.8 Blackout ........................................................................................................................ 76

2.10.9

Engine control ............................................................................................................... 80

2.10.10 Starting phase ............................................................................................................... 83

2.10.11 Stopping phase ............................................................................................................. 86

2.10.12 Preferential trip limits/Abnormal BUS condition ............................................................. 91

2.10.13 Additional limits ............................................................................................................. 94

3 Relay settings ......................................................................................................................... 97

3.1 ANSI 15 – Matching device (motorpoty) ........................................................................ 99

3.2 ANSI 24 – Overexcitation Relay .................................................................................. 105

3.3

ANSI 25 /A – Automatic Synchronizing ....................................................................... 106

3.4 ANSI 27 – Undervoltage Relay ................................................................................... 114

3.5 ANSI 27 B – BUS undervoltage relay .......................................................................... 116

3.6 ANSI 32 – Overload Relay .......................................................................................... 117

3.7 ANSI 37 – Undercurrent Relay (motor) ....................................................................... 119

3.8

ANSI 40 Q – Loss of Excitation Relay ......................................................................... 120

3.9 ANSI 46 – Negative Sequence Relay.......................................................................... 122

3.10 ANSI 47 – Phase sequence voltage relay ................................................................... 125

3.11 ANSI 49 – Thermal Overload ...................................................................................... 126

3.11.1 Thermal overload I (general) ....................................................................................... 126

3.11.2 Thermal overload II (user) ........................................................................................... 129

3.11.3

Thermal overload III (interval) ..................................................................................... 131

3.12 ANSI 50 BF – Breaker Failure ..................................................................................... 132

3.13 ANSI 50 – Instantaneous overcurrent relay ................................................................. 133

3.14 ANSI 50G/N – Instantaneous ground overcurrent relay............................................... 135



Service Manual


3.15 ANSI 51 – AC time overcurrent relay .......................................................................... 137

3.16 ANSI 51G/N – AC time ground overcurrent relay ........................................................ 141

3.17 ANSI 51 LR – Locked Rotor ........................................................................................ 143

3.18 ANSI 59 – Overvoltage relay ....................................................................................... 145

3.19 ANSI 59 B – BUS overvoltage relay ............................................................................ 147

3.20 ANSI 64/59N – Overvoltage ground relay ................................................................... 148

3.21

ANSI 66 – Start Inhibit for Motors ................................................................................ 150 3.22

ANSI 67 – AC Directional Overcurrent Relay .............................................................. 151

3.23 ANSI 67GS/GD – AC directional ground overcurrent relay .......................................... 155

3.24 ANSI 78 – Vector surge/dF/dt supervision relay .......................................................... 158

3.25 ANSI 78 S Out-of-step tripping .................................................................................... 160

3.26 ANSI 79 – AC reclosing relay ...................................................................................... 163

3.27

ANSI 81 – Frequency relay ......................................................................................... 166

3.28 ANSI 81 B – BUS frequency relay ............................................................................... 169

3.29 ANSI 86 – Lockout relay ............................................................................................. 171

3.30 ANSI 87 – Differential protection relay ........................................................................ 172

3.31 ANSI 87LD – Line Differential Protection .................................................................... 176

3.32

ANSI 87 N – Restrict earth fault relay .......................................................................... 180

3.33

ANSI 94 – Supervision relay ....................................................................................... 183

3.34 ANSI 95 i – Inrush blocking relay ................................................................................ 187

3.35 ANSI FF – Fuse failure (voltages) ............................................................................... 189

3.36 Auxiliary limits ............................................................................................................. 191

3.37 ANSI CW Contact wear measurement ....................................................................... 193

3.38 ANSI FL Fault Locator................................................................................................ 197

4 Alarm controller sett ings ..................................................................................................... 199

5 Special parameters .............................................................................................................. 203

6 Maintenance, Servicing and Retesting ............................................................................... 205



Service Manual


1 Parameter settings introduction

1.1 Change of settings

All settings can be easily set or changed directly with the front panel keys of SYMAP® without any

additional programming device or laptop computer. A menu tree structure offers easy access to thefunctions. To change a setting or to set new settings, first select the parameter with the Up-key andDown-key and then press the Enter-key. The requested digit can be selected by using the Left-keyand Right-key. The digit can be changed by pressing the Up-key and Down-key. After finishing thechange of values (numbers) or text declaration, such as “ON” or “OFF”, press the Enter-key. Thenext parameter may now be selected by pressing the Up-key and the Down key.

1.2 Event system introduction

The event system of the device gives the user the possibility to realize his own applications. Withevents all functions of the device can be activated or deactivated. An event is an internal logical

representation of a device process. The event system offers sources and sinks of events.The event sources have fixed unique event numbers. These event numbers became active(logically “True”) if the condition related to this event is fulfilled (e.g. a limit is reached), otherwiseinactive (logically “False”).The event sinks are linked to fixed processes or fixed functions and can be programmed by theuser. The user can build a link between the source and the sink by setting an event source numberto an event sink number. The sink (function) became active if the related source became alsoactive.

NOTE: Some modules are sinks and sources at the same time, e.g. all binary outputs are sinksand will be activated by source events. But every binary output produces himself againsource events when he becomes active. The same is valid for alarms and all eventbuilder elements.The source events can be combined over logic modules (event builder) which producenew source events.

Examples:

• The ANSI 25 /A Synchronizing unit 1 should be activated by a binary input (Function 20).The binary input is an event source and the Sync. unit is an event sink. The eventnumber related to the input is [0521].This number must be set on parameter [1000] (SYNC. UNIT 1 active by: [0521]) by theuser. Then Function 20 activates the Sync. unit 1.

• The ANSI 50 overcurrent relay should open a circuit breaker over a binary output (Shunt#1). ANSI 50 is an event source and the binary output an event sink (respectively asource). One event number related to ANSI 50 is [1402] (1.limit reached and delaypassed).This number must be set on Shunt #1 (e.g. 01: [1402]). Then a measured current valuewill open a circuit breaker.



Service Manual


1.3 Graphical Quick User Guide – e.g. SYMAP®-Y

( 1 )

( 2 )

M E T E R S

A L A R M S

P R O C E S S

F 1

M E T E R S

F 1

M E T E R S

E N T E R

M E N U

E N

T E R

M

E N U

F 2

A L A R M S

M E T E R S L I S T

D I S P L A Y

A L A R M / E V E N T L I S T

E N T E R

M E N U

P R O C E S S L I S T

E N T E R

M E N U

M O D B U S

P r o f i b u s D P

M O D B U S ( R S 4

2 2 )

F 3

P R O C E S S

E X I T

F 4

→

E X I T F

4 →

E X I T

F 4

→

A L A R M S

P R O C E S S

M E T E R S

P R O C E S S

M E T E R S

A L A R M S

( A )

( B )

( C )

F 1

M E T E R S

( B )

F 2

A L A R M S

( C )

F 1

M E T E R S

( A )

F 2

A L A R M S

( C )

F 1

M E T E R S

( A )

F 2

A L A R M S

( B )

E N T E R

M E N U

E N T E R

M E N U

E N T E R

M E N U

O v e r v i e w

C u r r e n t m e t e r s

V o l t a g e m e t e r s

P o w e r m e t e r s

C o u n t e r

G r o u n d v a l u e s

H a r m o n i c w a v e s

F r e q u e n c y m e t e r s

A n a l o g i n p u t s

D i s p l a y s e t t i n g

A c t i v e a l a r m s

A l a r m g r o u p s

A c t i v e e v e n t s

E v e n t h i s t o r y

D e t a i l e d h i s t o r y

I n t e r l o c k p a g e

S y s t e m f a i l p a g e

S y n c h r o

n i z e r

B r e a k e r

c o u n t e r

S Y N C H R O N I S I N G P A G E

B R E A K E R C O U N T E R

A L A R M

P A G E

G R O U P S

E V E N

T S

E V E N T H I S T O R Y

D E T A I L E D P R O

T . H I S T O R Y

I N T E R L O C

K P A G E

S Y T E M F A

I L P A G E

M E T E R S O V E R V I E W

C U R R E N T M E T E R S

V O L T A G E M E T E R S

P O W E R M E T E R S

C O U N T E R

G R O U N D V A L U E S

H A R M O N I C W A V E S

F R E Q U E N C Y M E T E R

A N A L O G I N P U T S

D I S P L A Y S E T T I N G

O v e r v i e w

A c t i v e A l a r m s

S y n c h r o

n i z e r

F 4

→

Figure 1-1 Menu navigation – part 1



Service Manual


( 2 )

( 3 )

C O N T R O L

E N T E R P A S S W O R D !

* * * *

E N T E R

M E N U

S Y S T E M

S Y S T E M

C O N T R O L

F 1

M E T E R S

B R E A K E R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

m o d e

: „ L O C A L “

p r o c e s s : „ A U T O “

s t a t e

:

„ U N L O C K E D . “

r e c l o s e r :

„ O F F “

S Y S T E M - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

b e e p e r :

„ O F F “

h e a t e r :

„ O N “

L O C K O U T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

s t a t e

:

„ C L O S E D “

R e s e t

:

- - - -

E N T E R

M E N U

B e t r i e b

E N T E R

M E N U

E X I T

F 4

→

V E R S I O N

: „ n o n e “

E N T E R

M E N U

V E R S I O N

E N T E R

M

E N U

E

X I T

A P P L I C :

A N W E N D U N G E N

F 2

A L A R M S

V E R S I O N

: „ n o n e “

V E R S I O N

„ 6 "

S C H A L T E R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B e t r i e b

: „ L O C A L “

P r o z e s s

: „ A U T O “

Z u s t a n d

: „ E N T R I E G . “

R e c l o s e r : „ A U S “

S Y S T E M - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

P i e p e r

: „ A U S “

H e i z e r

: „ E I N “

L O C K O U T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Z u s t a n d

: „ Z U “

L ö s c h e n

: - - - -

B e t r i e b

S C H A L T E R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B e t r i e b

: „ L O C A L “

P r o z e s s

: „ A U T O “

Z u s t a n d

: „ E N T R I E G . “

R e c l o s e r : „ A U S “

S Y S T E M - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

P i e p e r

: „ A U S “

H e i z e r

: „ E I N “

L O C K O U T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Z u s t a n d

: „ Z U “

L ö s c h e n

: - - - -

B e t r i e b

S

C H A L T E R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

B

e t r i e b

: „ L O C A L “

P

r o z e s s

: „ A U T O “

Z

u s t a n d

: „ E N T R I E G . “

R

e c l o s e r : „ A U S “

S

Y S T E M

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

P

i e p e r

: „ A U S “

H

e i z e r

: „ E I N “

L

O C K O U T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Z

u s t a n d

: „ Z U “

L

ö s c h e n

: - - - -

B

e t r i e b

„ R E M O T E “

E X I T ( 1 )

F 2

A L A R M S

( 1 )

F 4

→








Service Manual


S y s t e m s t a t u s

T e s t b o x ( I / O )

S S C - T r a n s f e r s t a t u s

S S C - M U / R U - D a t a

C A N - T r a n s f e r s t a t u s

S e r i a l c h a n n e l

T r a n s p o n d e r

E E P R O M s t a t u s

E X T . b o a r d ( A D C s )

S o f t w a r e

R e l a i s d r i v e r

Q S - O v e r v i e w

E N T E R

M E N U

S y s t e m s t a t u s

F 1

M E T E R S

C A L I B -

F 2

A L A R M S

T E S T M O D E

N V R - R E S T

( 1 )

( 5 )

C A L I B R A T I O N P A R A M E T E R

0 0 0

9 . D e v i c e s e r i a l n u m b e r :

0

0 0 1

0 . U 1 g e n

C A L .

- X 1 / 1 7 :

1 0 0 %

0 0 1

1 . U 2 g e n

C A L .

- X 1 / 1 9 :

1 0 0 %

0 0 1

2 . U 3 g e n

C A L .

- X 1 / 2 1 :

1 0 0 %

… … … 0 0 9

2 .

– P T 1 0 0

:

2 . 0 s e c

E N T E R

M E N U

… P a r a m e t e r . . .

E X I T

F 4

→

… P a r a m e t e r . . . … P a r a m e t e r s . . .

T E S T M O D E

E

X I T

F 4

→

C a l i b r a t e

E N T E R

M E N U

… P a r a m e t e r . . . … P a r a m e t e r . . . … P a r a m e t e r s . . .

T e s t / P a r a m e t e r s e t t i n g

E N T E R

M E N U

S E R V I C E L I S T

F 3

P R O C E S S

( D

A T A ) S Y S T E M

S T A T U S

( D A T A ) T e s t b o x ( I / O )

( D A T A ) S S C - T r a n s f e r s t a t u s

( D

A T A ) S S C - M U / R U - D a t a

( D A

T A ) C A N - T r a n s f e r s t a t u s

( D A T A ) S e r i a l c h a n n e l

( D A T A ) T r a n s p o n d e r

( D A T A ) E E P R O M s t a t u s

( D A T A ) E X T . b o a r d s ( A D C s )

( D A T A ) S o f t w a r e

( D A T A ) R e l a i s d r i v e r

( D A T A ) Q S - O v e r v i e w

E N T E R

M E N U

E X I T

F 4

→

S E R V I C E

E X I T

( 1 )

0 0 0

9 . D e v i c e s e r i a l n u m b e r :

0

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

:

S h u n t # 1

C y c l e s

:

1 0 0 0

O n - t i m e

:

0 . 1 0 s e c

O f f - t i m e

:

0 . 1 0 s e c

A c t i o n : O F F

O N

C Y C L E

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Q S - - - - - - - - - - - - -

K E Y B O A R D

:

O F F

L E D C Y C L E

:

O F F

B E E P E R

:

O F F

I / O - t e s t

:

O F F

W a t c h d o g

:

O F F

B I N . O U T P U T

E N T E R

M E N U

C a l i b r a t i o n t o l e r a n c e :

0 , 1 0 %

- - S e

l e c t - - - - - - - - - - - S o u r c e - - - - - - - - - - - - S t a t u s —

U g e n / I g e n

2 3 0 . 9 4 V / 1 A

I > >

1 0 A

U b u s

2 3 0 . 9 4 V

U b u s 2

n o n e

I d i f

f

n o n e

U g n d 1

n o n e / n o n e

I g n d 1

1 A / 5 A

U a u x

6 0 V d c

S h u

n t ½

6 0 V d c / 6 0 V d c

E N T E R

M E N U

-------------------------

-------------------------

E N T E R

M E N

U

B A C K

F 3

P R O C E S S

E X I T

( 1 )

C A L . M O D E

D E F A U L T

N O

M I N A L

F 2

A L A R M S

F 1

M E T E R S

E X I T

F 4

→

F 3

P R O C E S S

( H \ 0 2 )

F 3

P R O C E S S

F 4

→

F 4

→

E N T E R

M E N U

A c c e s s o n l y b y

S t u c k e E l e c t r o n i c G m b H !




Service Manual


2 System settings

Figure 2-1 shows the different system parameter groups.

Figure 2-1 System parameter group s

SYSTEM PARAMETER

00 Codes01 General par amet er02 Nomi nal r at i o val ues03 Communi cat i on04 Anal ogous i nputs05 Bi nar y i nput s06 Anal ogous out puts07 Bi nary out put s08 Event bui l der09 Power management

EXI TRELAY ALARMS



Service Manual


2.1 Codes

The system codes are used to define access levels for the user (see figure 2-2).

Figure 2-2 Codes

Parameter description:

0001. Breaker/system control :Only for breaker or system control, not for change of settings

0002. Settings w/o ev.builder :

For breaker or system control and for change of settings, but without codes and eventbuilder

0003. Master password : Access without restrictions

NOTE: The default codes have all the value 1111.

The passwords can be disabled by setting all 3 passwords (parameters [0001] to [0003]) to zero(also for Types with Transponder). In this case the device is accessible only with a transpondercard or the Parameter Tool, and the access to this Codes setting page of the device is blocked.

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 99990- 99990- 9999

CODES

0001. Br eaker / syst em cont r ol : 11110002. Set t i ngs w/ o ev. bui l der : 11110003. Mast er password : 1111

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


2.2 General Parameter

The general parameters of SYMAP® contains the setting of the on-board real time clock, theselection of the graphic mimic for the LC-Display and the definition of the corresponding circuit-breaker feedback signals (see figures 2-3 to 2-9).

Figure 2-3 General Parameter-1


BACKEXI T

GENERAL PARAMETER↑

0112. Check cont r ol access : ON 0113. BREAKER 1 –ON f eedback : 5000114. –OFF f eedback: 00115. - ON- >OFF cont r ol event0116. - OFF- >ON cont r ol event0117. - I N f eedback : 00118. - OUT f eedback : 00119. - OUT- >I N cont r ol event0120. - I N- >OUT cont r ol event0121. – EARTH ON f eedback : 00122. – EARTH OFF f eedback : 00123. - EARTH- >OFF ct r l . event

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ON0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl y

GENERAL PARAMETER

0100. TI ME set t i ng - hour s : 160101. - mi nut es: 470102. DATE set t i ng - year : 20030103. – month : 100104. - day : 210105. – f ormat : YY. MM. DD0106. LANGUAGE - sel ect : ENGLI SH0107. GRAPHI C TYPE – sel ect : 1B ES. F- O0108. Change mai n page : OFF

0109. Fr eq. aver age bui l der : 2. 5 sec0110. Power average bui l der : 3. 5 sec0111. Met er s aver age bui l der : 10. 0 sec

↓ BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 240- 602002- 20400- 120- 31D. M. Y, Y. M. D, M. D. YENGLI SH/ GERMAN/ FRENCH/ RUSSI AN/ …( see Appendi x A3)OFF/ Layout 1/ Layout 2

0. 0- 10. 0 sec0. 0- 10. 0 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec



Service Manual






0148. – EARTH OFF f eedback : 00149. - EARTH- >OFF ct r l . event0150. - OFF- >EARTH ct r l . event0151. – ctr l . t i me ( f ai l ev. ) : 15. 0 sec 0152. COUNTER - Wor ki ng hour s: 0 h0153. – cycl e l i mi t : 0 h0154. – Act i ve power( f wd) P+ : 00155. – Act i ve power ( r ev) P- : 00156. – React . power( cap) Q+ : 00157. – React . power ( i nd) Q- : 00158. – Br eaker 1 ON cycl es : 00159. – EARTH cycl es : 0

↓

Set t i ng range:

0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 999999 hour s0- 60000 hour s0- 42949672800- 42949672800- 42949672800- 42949672800- 655350- 65535

BACK EXI T


0136. - EARTH- >OFF ct r l . event0137. - OFF- >EARTH ct r l . event0138. – ctr l . t i me ( f ai l ev. ) : 15. 0 sec 0139. BREAKER 3 –ON f eedback : 00140. –OFF f eedback: 00141. - ON- >OFF cont r ol event0142. - OFF- >ON cont r ol event0143. - I N f eedback : 0

0144. - OUT f eedback : 00145. - OUT- >I N cont r ol event0146. - I N- >OUT cont r ol event0147. – EARTH ON f eedback : 0

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

event di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0. 0- 999. 9 sec 0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0- 9999 Event

0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0- 9999 Event

BACK EXI T


0124. - OFF- >EARTH ct r l . event0125. – ctr l . t i me ( f ai l ev. ) : 15. 0 sec0126. BREAKER 2 –ON f eedback : 5020127. –OFF f eedback: 0

0128. - ON- >OFF cont r ol event0129. - OFF- >ON cont r ol event0130. - I N f eedback : 00131. - OUT f eedback : 00132. - OUT- >I N cont r ol event0133. - I N- >OUT cont r ol event0134. – EARTH ON f eedback : 5040135. – EARTH OFF f eedback : 0

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

event di spl ay onl y0. 0- 9999. 9 sec0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Eventevent di spl ay onl yevent di spl ay onl y0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Event

BACK EXI T



Service Manual





0100. Time setting - hours :

Setting of hours of the integrated real time clock (RTC)NOTE: If devices are connected over the CANBUS1 they will synchronize their RTCs

automatically.

0101. - minutes :Setting of minutes of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0102. Date setting - year :Setting of year of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0103. - month :Setting of month of the integrated real time clock (RTC)


0172. REMOTE – ACK : 5260173. Swi t ch op. mode( l oc/ r em) : 00174. ( P- ) - kWh/ pul se : 00175. - pul se dur at i on : 0. 00 sec0176. ( Q+) - kvar h/ pul se : 00177. - pul se dur at i on : 0. 00 sec0178. ( Q- ) - kvar h/ pul se : 00179. - pul se dur at i on : 0. 00 sec

2480. Bl ock ACK- key by event : 0 ev.2481. Swi t ch OFF LCD/ LEDs by : 0 ev.2482. Wor ki ng hour s l i mi t 1 : 0 h2483. Wor ki ng hour s l i mi t 2 : 0 h

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Event0- 655350. 01- 655. 34 sec0- 655350. 01- 655. 34 sec0- 655350. 01- 655. 34 sec

0- 9999 Event0- 9999 Event0- 65000 h0- 65000 h

BACK EXI T


0160. – Br eaker 2 ON cycl es : 00161. – EARTH cycl es : 00162. – Br eaker 3 ON cycl es : 00163. – Br eaker 1 ON max. cyc. : 10000

0164. – EARTH max. cyc. : 100000165. – Br eaker 2 ON max. cyc. : 100000166. – EARTH max. cyc. : 100000167. – Br eaker 3 ON max. cyc. : 100000168. – kWh- pul ses ( P+) : ON0169. – kWh/ pul se : 100170. – pul se dur at i on: 0. 05 sec0171. CB CLOSED( Net ) f eedback: 0

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 655350- 655350- 655350- 65535

0- 655350- 655350- 655350- 65535ON/ OFF0- 655350. 01- 655. 34 sec0- 9999 Event

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0104. - day :Setting of day of the integrated real time clock (RTC)

0105. - format :Selection of shown format of the date

0106. LANGUAGE - select : Actually available:ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, RUSSIAN, SERBIAN, SPANISH and TURKISH.The languages are valid for the user menu, not for the settings menu section (this section isalways in English).

0107. GRAPHIC TYPE - select :Selection of the shown graphic (BUS and breaker arrangement). For details refer to the Appendix A3.

0108. Change main page :With this parameter different layouts (with bar graphs) for the main page can be selected.

0109. Freq. average builder :Real average builder for the gen. freq. with max. 10 sec period. The builder influences allprocesses related to the freq. (display, comm., analog outputs, PM…).

0110. Power average bui lder :Real average builder for the sum active power with max. 10 sec period. The builderinfluences all processes related to the active power (display, power counter, PM…).

0111. Meters average bui lder :This parameter is valid both for all meter values displayed on all pages and on the 7-segment displays and for those into communication transferred measured values. This

parameter does not affect the measured values for the protection. If the changing of a valueis below the deadband limit (parameter [0074], see chapter 5) the average builder will planethe value (Exception: On the current meters page the column “average” is build alwayseven if the value is higher than the deadband limit).

0112. Check control access :

• “OFF”: free breaker control over the front panel

• “ON”: password protected breaker control over the front panel

0113. BREAKER 1 -ON feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “ON” feedback

0114. -OFF feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “OFF” feedback

0115. - ON−>OFF control event :Control event of the ON −> OFF switching cycle of breaker no. 1; is activated by “Breakercontrol” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0116. - OFF−>ON control event :Control event of the OFF −> ON switching cycle of br eaker no. 1; is activated by “Breakercontrol” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0117. - IN feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “IN” position feedback



Service Manual


0118. - OUT feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “OUT” position feedback

0119. - OUT−>IN control event :Control event of the OUT −> IN position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by“Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0120. - IN−>OUT control event :Control event of the IN −> OUT position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by“Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0121. - EARTH ON feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “EARTH ON” positionfeedback

0122. - EARTH OFF feedback : Assignment of the belonging function input of the breaker no. 1; “EARTH OFF” positionfeedback

0123. - EARTH−>OFF ctrl. event :Control event of the EARTH −> OFF position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by“Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0124. - OFF->EARTH ctrl . event :Control event of the OFF −> EARTH position; movement of breaker no. 1; is activated by“Breaker control” and “Interlock diagrams” (see chapter 2.9).

0125. - ctr l. time (fail ev.) :Setting of supervision time (control time) of the maximum operation time of a switchingcycle or position movement of breaker 1; if the breaker does not reach the desired position

within this time event [0125] will become active (until ACK). Use this event to trigger analarm for an error message.

0126. BREAKER 2 -ON feedback :to

0138. - ctr l. Time (fail ev.) :See description of Breaker 1 (events [0113] to [0125])

0139. BREAKER 3 -ON feedback :to

0151. - ctr l. Time (fail ev.) :See description of Breaker 1 (events [0113] to [0125])

0152. COUNTER - Working hours :Setting of the counter of working hours. The counter is active if a Gen. frequency isdetected. The counter is also active if parameter [1930] is enabled and the CB is closed(see ANSI - CW Contact wear measurement).

0153. - cycle limit :The limit is enabled if P[0153] is greater zero. Event E[0153] will be activate for one impulseif the internal counter reaches the limit of P[0153]. Than the internal counter will be reset tozero and the counting starts again. The internal counter is stored nonvolatile.

0154. - Acti ve power (fwd) P+ :

Setting of the counter of active power (forward) Pw+ in kWh



Service Manual


0155. - Acti ve power (rev) P- :Setting of the counter of active power (reverse) Pw- in kWh

0156. - React. Power (cap) Q+ :Setting of the counter of reactive power (capacitive) Pq+ in kvarh

0157. - React. Power (ind) Q- :Setting of the counter of reactive power (inductive) Pq- in kvarh

0158. - Breaker 1 ON cycles :Setting of the cycle counter of disconnecting switch no. 1

0159. - EARTH cycles :Setting of the cycle counter of the earth switch no. 1


0161. - EARTH cycles :Setting of the cycle counter of the earth switch no. 2


0163. - Breaker 1 ON max.cyc. :Setting of maximum cycles of disconnecting switch no. 1 before next inspection

0164. - EARTH max.cyc. :Setting of maximum cycles of earthing switch no. 1 before next inspection


0166. - EARTH max.cyc. :Setting of maximum cycles of earthing switch no. 2 before next inspection


0168. - kWh-pulses (P+) :Selection if the kWh-pulse function is switched “ON” or “OFF”

0169. - kWh/pulse :Setting of kWh per counter pulse

0170. - pulse duration :Setting of the pulse duration; use the event [0170] to drive an binary output.

0171. CB CLOSED (Net) feedback :This parameter is usable only for the PM (Device Type G). If this parameter is set and thesetted event is active the device has the status “CB CLOSED” (independent of the selectedgraphic). The “CB” status depends on the graphic if parameter [0171] is not set.

0172. REMOTE - ACK :

Assignment of the belonging function input of the remote acknowledgement.

0173. Switch op.mode (loc/rem) : Assignment of the belonging function input of the local/remote mode switch



Service Manual


0174. (P-) - kWh/pulse :Setting of kWh (revers active power) per counter pulse (zero means deactive)

0175. - pulse duration :Setting of the pulse duration; use the event [0175] to drive a binary output

0176. (Q+) - kvarh/pulse :Setting of kvarh reactive power (capacitive) per counter pulse (zero means deactive)


0178. (Q-) - kvarh/pulse :Setting of kvarh reactive power (inductive) per counter pulse (zero means deactive)


2480. Block ACK-key by event :Blocks the ACK-key if the event is active (except the reset of the beeper)

2481. Switch OFF LCD/LEDs by :Disables all LEDs and LCD Backlight if the event is active.

2482. Working hours limit 1 :2483. Working hours limit 2 :

If the working hours counter [0152] reaches these limits, the event numbers [2482] or[2483] are getting active. The events will than remain active. The limits are disabled if theparameters are set to zero.



Service Manual


2.3 Nominal Ratio Values

With the nominal ratio values the user can select the different external transformer types (seefigures 2-10 to 2-12).

Figure 2-10 Nominal Ratio Values-1


NOMI NAL RATI O VALUES↑

0212. –secondary si de: 100 V0213. PT GND2 –pr i mary si de: 0 V0214. –secondary si de: 0 V0215. CT GND1 - pr i mary si de: 1000 A0216. –secondary si de: 5 A0217. CT GND2 - pr i mary si de: 0 A0218. –secondary si de: 0 A0219. CT DI FF - pr i mary si de: 0 A0220. Tr ansf . wi ndi ng r at i o : 1. 000221. Uaux nomi nal i nput : 110Vac0222. Shunt #1 nomi nal i nput : 110Vac0223. Shunt #2 nomi nal i nput : 110Vac0224. CT DI FF2 - pr i mary si de: 0 A ↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 65535 V0- 999999 V

0- 65535 V0- 65535 A0- 65535 A0- 65535 A0- 65535 A0- 65535 A0. 01- 99. 99 Wpr i m/ Wsec 24 Vdc- 230 Vac24 Vdc- 230 Vac24 Vdc- 230 Vac0- 65535 A

NOMI NAL RATI O VALUES0200. NOMI NAL RATED – Cur r ent : 1000 A0201. – Vol t age: 25400 V0202. - Power : 35195 kW0203. – Fr equency: 60 Hz0204. CT Feeder –pr i mary si de: 1000 A0205. PT Feeder –pr i mary si de: 25400 V0206. –secondary si de: 100 V0207. PT BUS1 –pr i mary si de: 25400 V0208. –secondary si de: 100 V0209. PT BUS2 –pr i mary si de: 25400 V

0210. –secondary si de: 100 V0211. PT GND1 –pr i mary si de: 25400 V↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng range:

0- 65535 A0- 999999 V0- 999999 kW50/ 60 Hz0- 65535 A0- 999999 V0- 65535 V0- 999999 V0- 65535 V0- 999999 V

0- 65535 V0- 999999 V



Service Manual




0200. NOMINAL RATED - Current :Setting of the nominal rated current of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer primaryside

0201. - Voltage :Setting of the nominal rated voltage of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer primary

side

0202. - Power :Setting of the nominal rated active power of the feeder, generator, motor or transformerprimary side

0203. - Frequency :Setting of the nominal rated frequency of the feeder, generator, motor or transformer

0204. CT Feeder - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the feeder current measuringcurrent transformer (CT)

0205. PT Feeder - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the feeder voltage measuringvoltage transformer (PT)

NOTE: Event [0205] is activated if a negative sequence of the feeder voltage is detected.This supervision is always active.

0206. - secondary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the feeder voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

NOMI NAL RATI O VALUES↑

0225. Tr ansf . wi ndi ng 2 r at i o: 1. 002460. NOM. SETTI NG - sel ector 1: 0 ev.2461. - sel ect or 2: 0 ev.2462. NOM. SETTI NG 2 - cur r ent : 0 A

2463. - vol t age : 0 V2464. - power : 0 kW2465. - f r eq. : 0 Hz2466. NOM. SETTI NG 3 - cur r ent : 0 A2467. - vol t age : 0 V2468. - power : 0 kW2469. - f r eq. : 0 Hz2470. NOM. SETTI NG 4 - cur r ent : 0 A2471. - vol t age : 0 V2472. - power : 0 kW2473. - f r eq. : 0 Hz

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0. 01- 99. 99 Wpr i m/ Wsec

0- 9999 Event number0- 9999 Event number0- 65000 A0- 65000 V0- 65000 kW0- 80 Hz0- 65000 A0- 65000 V0- 65000 kW0- 80 Hz0- 65000 A0- 65000 V0- 65000 kW0- 80 Hz



Service Manual


0207.PT BUS1 - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the BUS1 voltage measuringvoltage transformer (PT)

NOTE: Event [0207] is activated if a negative sequence of the BUS1 voltage is detected.This supervision is always active.

0208. - secondary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the BUS1 voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

0209. PT BUS2 - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the BUS2 voltage measuringvoltage transformer (PT)

NOTE: Event [0209] is activated if a negative sequence of the BUS2 voltage is detected.This supervision is always active.

0210. - secondary side :

Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the BUS2 voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

0211. PT GND1 - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the ground #1 voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

0212. - secondary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the ground #1 voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

0213. PT GND2 - primary side :

Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the primary side of the ground #2 voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

0214. - secondary side :Setting of the nominal rated voltage from the secondary side of the ground #2 voltagemeasuring voltage transformer (PT)

0215. CT GND1 - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the ground #1 currentmeasuring current transformer (CT)

0216. - secondary side :

Setting of the nominal rated current from the secondary side of the ground #1 currentmeasuring current transformer (CT)

0217. CT GND2 - primary side :Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the ground #2 currentmeasuring current transformer (CT)

0218. - secondary side :Setting of the nominal rated current from the secondary side of the ground #2 currentmeasuring current transformer (CT)

0219. CT DIFF - primary side :

Setting of the nominal rated current from the primary side of the differential currentmeasuring current transformer (CT)



Service Manual


0220. Transf. winding ratio :In case of transformer differential protection, the winding ratio of the transformer(WPrimary/WSecondary) must be adjusted. Both by the “Step Down Trafo” and by the “Step UpTrafo” the winding ratio is defined as WPrimary/WSecondary. This corresponds by “Step DownTrafo” the transmision ratio (primaryvoltage/lowvoltage) of the transformer. With the „StepUp Trafo“ is however the winding ratio (WPrimary/WSecondary) the reciprocal value of the

transmision ratio primaryvoltage/lowvoltage. From this a small number with many right-of-comma positions can result. Since the parameter [0220] of SYMAP® permits only two right-of-comma positions, if necessary, you must set the parameter [0220] on “1” and count thisvalue into the parameter [0219].

0221. Uaux nominal input :Setting of nominal rated voltage of the power supply of the device

0222. Shunt #1 nominal input :Setting of nominal rated voltage of the shunt #1 trip circuit

0223. Shunt #2 nominal input :

Setting of nominal rated voltage of the shunt #1 trip circuit

0224. CT DIFF2 - primary side :0225. Transf. winding 2 ratio :2460. NOM.SETTING - selector 1 :2461. - selector 2 :

These parameters support the selection of up to 3 additional settings for the nominalcurrent, voltage, power and frequency. If the selection has changed (parameters [2460] and[2461]) the device will reboot with the new nominals. Display on the main page (Setting No.(N#), In (A), Pn (kW), Un (V) and fn (Hz)) if the parameters [2460] and [2461] are set to avalue greater zero.

Table 2-1 Nominal settings selectors

Nominal Settings Selectors

Selector Nominalsetting

Valid nominal parameters

[2460] [2461] Current Voltage Power Frequency

inactive inactive 1 [0200] [0201] [0202] [0203]active inactive 2 [2462] [2463] [2464] [2465]inactive active 3 [2466] [2467] [2468] [2469]active active 4 [2470] [2471] [2472] [2473]

2462. NOM.SETTING 2 - current :to

2473. NOM.SETTING 4 – freq :The nominals (I, U, P, f) must be within the setting range of 10-65000.Freqency range: 40-80The ranges are also valid for the parameters [0200] to [0203].The limit parameters [0678], [0682], [0683], [0907], [0947], [0948], [0954] and [0955] will beadapt internally in reference to parameter [0203] and the new selected nominal frequency.



Service Manual


2.4 Communication

SYMAP® provides five communication ports. The RS232 port on the front panel is alwaysavailable. Use it to upload the firmware or to communicate with the SYMAP ® PC-tools. The otherports are on the backside, and they are programmable by the user with the parameters shown onFigures 2-13 and 2-14. Please note that the PROFIBUS and CANBUS ports are optional. Refer tothe order list for detailed information.

Figure 2-13 Communication parameters-1


COMMUNI CATI ON PARAMETER↑

0313. – aut om. i d. scan : OFF0314. CAN 2 - com. por t : ON0315. – number of nodes : 10316. – i dent i f i er : 10317. – i dent i f i er si ze : st andar d0318. – baud r ate : 125. 0 kBd0319. – appl i cat i on : MDEC303 V10320. – MDEC overr i de : 00321. r eserved :0322. SERI AL PORT 2 ( ASC2) : OFF0323. – addr ess : 00324. – baud r at e : 625000 Bd0325. Tel . No. – l eadi ng zer os : 00326. – Tel . No. par t 1 : 00327. – Tel . No. par t 2 : 0

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ONOFF/ ON1- 320- 65535st andard/ ext ended15. 6 kBd- 1000. 0 kBdnone, MDEC303al l , . . . , CANopen, ADEC0- 9999

OFF/ ON0- 655359600- 625000 Bd

BACK EXI T

COMMUNI CATI ON PARAMETER

0300. SERI AL PORT 1 ( ASC1) : OFF0301. – addr ess : 00302. – baud r at e : 57600 Bd0303. – pr otocol : PC TOOLS0304. PROFI BUS - com. por t : OFF0305. – addr ess : 00306. – f i r st byt e : LOW

0307. – appl i cat i on : none0308. CAN 1 - com. por t : OFF0309. – number of nodes: 20310. – i dent i f i er : 010311. – i dent i f i er si ze: st andar d0312. – baud r ate : 1000. 0 kBd

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ RS485/ RS422/ MODEM0- 2559600/ 19200/ 38400/ 57600/ 62500 PC TOOLS/ MODBUS/ KUHSE/ REMOTE

OFF/ ON0- 125LOW/ HI GH

noneON/ OFF1- 141- 14st andard/ ext ended15. 6 kBd- 1000. 0kBd

BACK EXI T



Service Manual




0300.SERIAL PORT 1 (ASC1) :Setting of the physical layer for this communication port; use the Terminals 26 (-) and 27 (+)of plug X2.2 for the RS485 communication. For RS422 use the Terminals 26 (RxD -), 27(RxD +), 28 (TxD -) and 29 (TxD+) of the same plug. If you do not want to use one of thesecommunications set this parameter to “OFF”.

0301. - address :Setting of the communication address of this device for RS 422/485

0302. - baudrate :Selection of the transmission speed for RS232/422/485; if there are some problems withthe communication it may be useful to lower the speed.

0303. - protocol :Selection of the protocol type; table 2-2 shows the possible applications the deviceprovides. For more details, please see Appendix A1.

Table 2-2 Available protocol s

Parameter [0303] Description

PC TOOLS for the HIMAP-BCG-toolsMODBUS for communication with a main control unitKUHSE special protocolREMOTE for communication between two HIMAP-BCG devices60870-103 for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocolBlueVis.1 Special protocol for MTU’s Blue Vision interface (version 1)BlueVis.2 Special protocol for MTU’s Blue Vision interface (version 2)

COMMUNI CATI ON PARAMETER↑

0328. I EC 61850 Communi cat i on: ON0329. - I P addr ess par t 1 ( L) : 1920330. - I P addr ess par t 2 : 1680331. - I P addr ess par t 3 : 2

0332. - I P addr ess par t 4 ( R) : 1200333. - Gateway addr ess par t 1: 1920334. - Gateway addr ess par t 2: 1680335. - Gateway addr ess par t 3: 20336. - Gateway addr ess par t 4: 10337. Ti me synchr on. ( SNTP) : ON0338. - Dayl i ght savi ng t i me : ON0339. - Local t i me zone : + 1 h0340. - Ser ver addr ess par t 1: 640341. - Server addr ess part 2: 1830342. - Ser ver addr ess par t 3: 560343. - Ser ver addr ess par t 4: 58

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ON0- 2550- 2550- 255

0- 2550- 2550- 2550- 2550- 255OFF/ ONOFF/ ON- 23 - +230- 2550- 2550- 2550- 255

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0304.PROFIBUS - com. port :ON/OFF switch for the PROFIBUS port; the standard PROFIBUS DP V1 is fulfilled. Theparameters [0304] to [0307] work only with this communication port.

NOTE: Event [0304] is active if the device is exchanging data with the master.

0305. - address :

Setting of the communication address of this device for PROFIBUS communication; makesure that there is only one specific address in the communication.

0306. -first byte :Selection of the transmission sequence of a word (16 bit = 2 bytes) or of a long word (32 bit= 4 bytes); choose “HIGH” to transmit the high byte first or choose “LOW” to transmit thelow byte first.

0307. - application :Reserved for special applications

0308. CAN1 - com. por t :

ON/OFF switch for the CANBUS1 port; the parameters [0308] to [0313] work only with thisfirst CAN-communication port.

NOTE: If devices are connected over the CANBUS1 they will synchronize their RTCs (realtime clocks) automatically. In this case, the RTC of the node with the smallestCAN-Identifier (parameter [0310]) is the reference for all other RTCs (extendedboard setting: see Users manual, chapter 1.8).

0309. - number of nodes :This parameter shows the number of devices connected to the CAN-communication. Ifthere are less nodes than this number detected on the CANBUS1 system failure [3019](“CAN1 node error”) will be activated.

NOTE: An extension board is not a node in this sense.

0310. - identifi er :Setting of the communication identifier of this device for CAN-communication. Make surethat there is only one specific main device identifier in the communication. For thecommunication to the extension board CMA216 and CMA218, you must use this sameidentifier setting also for the extension board.

0311. - identifi er size :Selection of the identifier format; choose “standard” for the 11 bit identifier; or choose“extended” for the 29 bit identifier.

0312. - baud rate :Selection of the transmission speed for CAN-communication; if there are some problemswith the communication it may be useful to lower the speed.

0313. - autom. id. scan :The automatic allocation of the identifiers over the CANBUS1 can be enabled with thisparameter. In that case the system failures [3008], [3019] and [3043] are disabled, and onthe Main page “CAN: number of devices” is displayed instead of “NET” (Device type G).The system will reorganize the identifiers (starting with “1”) if more than one device with thesame identifier parameter [0310] are detected on the CANBUS1. The allocation processtakes around 15 sec. During this process the PM is idle and the “number of devices”-

display is blinking.



Service Manual


0314. CAN2 - com. por t :ON/OFF switch for the CANBUS2 port; the parameters [0314] to [0319] work only with thissecond CAN-communication port.

0315. - number of nodes :This parameter shows the number of devices connected to the CAN-communication.

0316. - identifi er :Setting of the communication identifier of this device for CAN-communication; make surethat there is only one specific identifier in the communication.

0317. - identifi er size :Selection of the identifier format; choose “standard” for the 11 bit identifier or choose“extended” for the 29 bit identifier.

0318. - baud rate :Selection of the transmission speed for CAN-communication; if there are some problemswith the communication it may be useful to lower the speed.

0319. - application :This parameter defines the application of the second CANBUS-port. Table 2-3 shows thepossible applications the device provides.

Table 2-3 Appl ication of the second CANBUS-por t

Parameter [0319] Description

none CANBUS2-port switched offMDEC303 all Special communication protocol for MDEC controller (MTU); if MDEC application is

in use then the baud rate of 125 kbaud will be set internally, as well as theidentifier, 6, and the identifier size, standard. In version “V1” only the mostimportant data will be displayed. With option “all ”, all data of the protocol will beshown on LCD.

MDEC303 V1

CANopen For the CANopen protocol (refer to Appendix A1) ADEC Special communication protocol for ADEC controller (MTU).

0320. - MDEC overr ide :]Only for CANBUS2 application: MDEC 303If the set event number is active the MDEC function “override” also becomes active.

NOTE: This means that the MTU-diesel will NOT stop if any engine trouble occurs.

[0322. SERIAL PORT 2 (ASC2) :]This port is only available for special differential protection applications.

[0323. - address :]Setting of the communication address of this device

[0324. - baud rate :]Selection of the transmission speed

[0325. Tel.No. - leading zeros :][0326. - Tel.No. part 1 :][0327. - Tel.No. part 2 :]

These parameters are used for special modem applications.



Service Manual


[0328. IEC 61850 Communication :The SYMAP® IEC61850 interface can be activated with parameter [P0328]. As soon as alink with the IEC 61850 client has established, the event [E0328] is being activated.

CAUTION: The serial channel is blocked if parameter [P0328] is enabled (so [P0328]must be disabled before up/downloading with the Parameter-Tool).

NOTE: The SYMAP® device consists of 20 “Logical Nodes” and 8 “Unbuffered ReportControl Blocks”. “DataSets” can be freely defined. All the “DataModels” can be viewed in the SCL-file: “Symap IEC61850 Server.icd”.

0329. - IP address part 1(L) :0330. - IP address part 2 :0331. - IP address part 3 :0332. - IP address part 4(R) :

The parameters [P0329] to [P0332] are used for setting the IP-address of the SYMAP® device. As soon as a Physical Ethernet Link has established, the event [E0329] is beingactivated.

0333. - Gateway address part 1 :0334. - Gateway address part 2 :0335. - Gateway address part 3 :0336. - Gateway address part 4 :

These parameters are used for setting the Router-address of the gateway.

0337. Time synchron. (SNTP) :Time synchronization via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) can be activated byparameter [P0337].

0338. - Daylight saving time :

Parameter [P0338] enables the automatic “Daylight saving time” switch (+1 hour between1:00 UTC on last Sunday in March and 1:00 UTC on last Sunday in October).

0339. - Local time zone :With parameter [P0339] the local time zone can be adjusted (±12 hours offset to UTC(GMT)).

0339. - Server address part 1 :0340. - Server address part 2 :0341. - Server address part 3 :0342. - Server address part 4 :

The time server IP-address can be set by parameters [P0340] to [P0343]. An Internet

connection and a router (see parameters [P0333] to [P0336]) must exist in order to get inconnection with an Internet time server. The Symap operates as a client sendingperiodically requests to the time server (512 sec polling interval).The SYMAP® device accepts also SNTP-Broadcast messages via Local Broadcast orMulticast from a local time server (SCADA Systems). In that case parameters [P0340] to[P0343] can be set all to zero, the SYMAP® device will not send any requests.

NOTE: There is a timesync counter (only successfull messages are counted) on thestatus display page. Please press ENTER – DISPLAY – IEC61850 to invokethe counter.



Service Manual


2.5 Analog Inputs

Within the main device, there are four analog inputs available. The selection of two physicalstandards and many measuring types is possible. In combination with an external board, thenumber of function inputs can be extended. An extended board can be connected to SYMAP ®,providing additional in and output channels. The extended board is customized to individual clientrequirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 21 analog inputs PT 100 or analog inputs 4-20 mA channels.Figure 2-15 shows an example of the parameter setting for analog input 1. With the change of themeasuring type, the unit of the measuring input will be adapted. Thus the unit of the followingparameter will be changed automatically.The settings for the other analog inputs are the same with the exception of the parameter/eventnumbers.The parameter/event numbers for the other analog inputs are listed at the end of this chapter.

Figure 2-16 Analog Input “ 01”


CURRENT INPUT 1 -X2.4/54, 55 :Name of the analog input with plug number and terminal numbers

- Function :

Selection of the physical standard for this special input

- Measuring type :This parameter defines the setting of the measuring type or the measuring unit. Table 2-4shows all possible selections.

ANALOG I NPUT – Sel ect : 01

CURRENT I NPUT 1 - X2. 4/ 54, 55- Funct i on : 0- 20 mA- Measur i ng t ype[ uni t ] : mA- Ful l scal e : 0. 0 mA- Zero scal e : 0. 0 mA

0400. – 1. Li mi t : 0. 0 mA- 1. Li mi t hi gh/ l ow : LOW

0401. – 1. Li mi t del ay t i me : 0. 0 sec0402. – 2. Li mi t : 0. 0 mA

- 2. Li mi t hi gh/ l ow : LOW0403. – 2. Li mi t del ay t i me : 0. 0 sec

- Hyst er esi s : 5. 0 %

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ 0- 20 mA/ 4- 20 mA/ 0- 10 Vsee Tabl e 2- 4 mA0. 0- 999. 9 mA0. 0- 999. 9 mA0. 0- 999. 9 mALOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 mALOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %



Service Manual


Table 2-4 Measuring types for analogous Inputs

Setting Description

mA The unit of the input is mAB1-Gas (bar)

Special application for GIS(NOTE: for this applicationthe parameter “function” must be set to: 4-20 mA)

B1-Gas (g/l)

B2-Gas (bar)B2-Gas (g/l)S1-Gas (bar)S1-Gas (g/l)S2-Gas (bar)S2-Gas (g/l)Gas (bar)Gas (g/l)Temp. (C) The unit of the input is °CTemp. (F) The unit of the input is Fahrenheit

Load (%)

The input can be used in combination with the asymmetric load controller(SYMAP

®-XG/-BCG only). If parameter [0935] (analog input) is set, the measured

value is the setpoint (actual value) for the asymmetric load controller. With the helpof the full and zero scale adjustment, the range can be limited

RPM (%)The input can be used as a tacho input (SYMAP

-XG/-BCG only). If parameter[0265] (see chapter 2.10.9) is set the measured value will be taken as a speedsignal

Fuel (l) The unit of the input is literFuel (m ) The unit of the input is mVoltage (V) The unit of this input is VPercent (%) Can be used for any measuringBar The unit of the input is barCUR-OUT 1

With this types, the analog outputs can be feed back to the analog inputs in order touse the limit events of the analog inputs (The unit for this types are mA).

CUR-OUT 2CUR-OUT 3CUR-OUT 4

- Full scale : Adjustment of the full scale point (20 mA = ?)

- Zero scale : Adjustment of the zero scale point (0 or 4 mA = ?)

0400. -.1. Limi t :Setting of the first limit event of this analog input; if the actual measured value is higher orlower than this limit event [0400] will be set.

- 1. Limit high/low :Selection of high or low level limit for parameter [0400]; in case of high limit, the actual

measured value has to exceed the limit of parameter [0400]. In case of low limit, the actualvalue has to fall below the limit to set the corresponding event.

0401. - 1. Limi t delay time :If event [0400] is active and this delay time is passed the event [0401] will be activated aslong as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0400]. Please use this parameterfor the alarm controller.

0402. - 2. Limi t :Setting of the first limit event of this analog input; if the actual measured value is higher orlower than this limit event [0402] will be set.



Service Manual


- 2. Limit high/low :Selection of high or low level limit for parameter [0402]; in case of high limit, the actualmeasured value has to exceed the limit of parameter [0402]. In case of low limit, the actualvalue has to fall below the limit to set the corresponding event.

0403. - 2. Limi t delay time :

If event [0402] is active and this delay time is passed the event [0403] will be activated aslong as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0402]. Please use this parameterfor the alarm controller.

- Hysteresis :Setting of the hysteresis for both limits

Table 2-5 Event numbers for the current inputs

Number of analogue inputEvent number1. Limit

Event number1. Limit delay time

Event number2. Limit


Analogue input 1 (4-20 mA) [0400] [0401] [0402] [0403]

Analogue input 2 (4-20 mA) [0404] [0405] [0406] [0407] Analogue input 3 (4-20 mA) [0408] [0409] [0410] [0411] Analogue input 4 (4-20 mA) [0412] [0413] [0414] [0415]



Service Manual


2.5.1 PT100 Inputs

The following temperature measuring inputs (see figure 2-17) are only available with the listedextension boards (see table 2-6) (with the main device there are no PT100 inputs).

Table 2-6 Connectors for temperature measuring inputs

Number of analogue inputCMA210 connectors(16 PT100 inputs)

CMA211 connectors(5 PT100 inputs)

05 (PT100-1) -X40: 1, 2, 3 -X44: 48, 49, 5006 (PT100-2) -X40: 4, 5, 6 -X44: 51, 52, 5307 (PT100-3) -X40: 7, 8, 9 -X44: 54, 55, 5608 (PT100-4) -X40: 10, 11, 12 -X44: 57, 58, 5909 (PT100-5) -X40: 13, 14, 15 -X44: 60, 61, 6210 (PT100-6) -X40: 16, 17, 18 not available11 (PT100-7) -X40: 19, 20, 21 not available12 (PT100-8) -X41: 25, 26, 27 not available13 (PT100-9) -X41: 28, 29, 30 not available14 (PT100-10) -X41: 31, 32, 33 not available15 (PT100-11) -X41: 34, 35, 36 not available

16 (PT100-12) -X41: 37, 38, 39 not available17 (PT100-13) -X41: 40, 41, 42 not available18 (PT100-14) -X41: 43, 44, 45 not available19 (PT100-15) -X41: 46,47, 48 not available20 (PT100-16) -X41: 49, 50, 51 not available

The description shows an example of the parameter setting for PT100-1. The settings for the othertemperature measuring inputs are the same with the exception of the parameter/event numbers.

Figure 2-17 Analog Input “ 05”


PT100-1 ext.board -X40/1, 2, 3 :

Name of the analogous input with plug number and terminal numbers

- Function :Selection of using this special input (ON/OFF switch)

- Measuring type :Setting of the physical sensor (Up to now only PT100 possible)

ANALOG I NPUT – Sel ect : 05

PT100- 1 ext . boar d –X40/ 1, 2, 3- Funct i on : OFF- Measur i ng t ype[ uni t ] : PT100 [ C]- Ful l scal e : 320. 0 C- Zer o scal e : - 40. 0 C

0416. – 1. Li mi t : + 0. 0 C- 1. Li mi t hi gh/ l ow : LOW

0417. – 1. Li mi t del ay t i me : 0. 0 sec0418. – 2. Li mi t : + 0. 0 C

- 2. Li mi t hi gh/ l ow : LOW0419. – 2. Li mi t del ay t i me : 0. 0 sec

- Hyst er esi s : 5. 0 %

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ONPT1000. 0°C- 999. 9°C- 999. 9°C t o +999. 9°C- 999. 9°C t o +999. 9°CLOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 sec- 999. 9°C t o +999. 9°CLOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %

ZUR CK ENDE



Service Manual


- Full scale : Adjustment of the full scale point (for calibration only); the range of the input is dependingon the hardware and not changeable with this parameter; for other ranges please contactthe manufacturer.

- Zero scale :

Adjustment of the zero scale point (for calibration only); the range of the input is dependingon the hardware and not changeable with this parameter.

0416. - 1. Limi t :Setting of the first limit event of this analog input; if the actual measured value is higher orlower than this limit event [0416] will be set.

- 1. Limit high/low :Selection of high or low level limit for parameter [0416]; in case of high limit, the actualmeasured value has to exceed the limit of parameter [0416]. In case of low limit, the actualvalue has to fall below the limit to set the corresponding event.


0418. - 2. Limi t :Setting of the first limit event of this analog input; if the actual measured value is higher orlower than this limit, event [0418] will be set.

- 2. Limit high/low :Selection of high or low level limit for parameter [0418]; in case of high limit, the actualmeasured value has to exceed the limit of parameter [0418]. In case of low limit, the actual

value has to fall below the limit to set the corresponding event.


- Hysteresis :Setting of the hysteresis for both limits



Service Manual


Table 2-7 Event numbers for the temperature measuring inpu ts

Number ofanalogue input





05 (PT100-1) [0416] [0417] [0418] [0419]06 (PT100-2) [0420] [0421] [0422] [0423]07 (PT100-3) [0424] [0425] [0426] [0427]08 (PT100-4) [0428] [0429] [0430] [0431]09 (PT100-5) [0432] [0433] [0434] [0435]10 (PT100-6) [0436] [0437] [0438] [0439]11 (PT100-7) [0440] [0441] [0442] [0443]12 (PT100-8) [0444] [0445] [0446] [0447]13 (PT100-9) [0448] [0449] [0450] [0451]14 (PT100-10) [0452] [0453] [0454] [0455]15 (PT100-11) [0456] [0457] [0458] [0459]16 (PT100-12) [0460] [0461] [0462] [0463]17 (PT100-13) [0464] [0465] [0466] [0467]18 (PT100-14) [0468] [0469] [0470] [0471]19 (PT100-15) [0472] [0473] [0474] [0475]20 (PT100-16) [0476] [0477] [0478] [0479]



Service Manual


2.6 Binary Inputs

SYMAP® provides with its basic unit 14 function inputs for user defined applications (see figure 2-18 and table 2-8). In combination with an external board, the number of function inputs can beextended. An extended board can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and outputchannels. The extended board is customized to individual client requirements and can be equippedto a maximum of 36 digital inputs channels.

Figure 2-18 Binary Inputs-1


- Select :Selects an binary input

0500. - Condit ion :Condition of the input; if the input is active event [0500] will be set. Conditions:

• “NORM.OPEN”: The input is normally open.

• “NORM.CLSD”: The input is normally closed.

• “N.O. + W.F.”: The input is normally open and the wirefault supervision is active.

• “N.C. + W.F.”: The input is normally closed and the wirefault supervision is active.

NOTE: The wirefault supervision is only available for the function inputs 10-23. Every inputhas a unique wirefault event number ([3321] to [3334]). These events can be usedfor alarming. Refer to table 2-8.

• “N.O. + INV.”: The input is normally open and the inverted event is released.

• “N.C. + INV.”: The input is normally closed and the inverted event is released.

NOTE: Only the after delay event will be inverted. Every input has a unique “Binary inputsinverted after delay event” ([3501] to [3599]). Refer to the event list in the Appendix A2.

0501. - Time delay :If the input is active and the delay is passed event [0501] will be set.

Set t i ng r ange:

*

0. 0- 6000. 0 sec

*NORM. OPEN/ NORM. CLSD/

N. O. + W. F/ N. C. + W. F/N. O. + I NV/ N. C. + I NV

BI NARY I NPUT EVENT – Sel ect : 500

FUNC. 10 I NPUT –X2. 3/ 30

0500. – Condi t i on : NORM. OPEN0501. – Ti me del ay: 0. 0 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


Table 2-8 shows the function inputs of the basic unit which can be used. All function inputs havethe same parameters with exception of the event and terminal numbers.

Table 2-8 Function inputs

Function Input EventnumberEvent number

after delayWire fault

Event numberPlug/Terminal

10 [0500] [0501] [3321] X2.3/30

11 [0502] [0503] [3322] X2.3/31

12 [0504] [0505] [3323] X2.3/32

13 [0506] [0507] [3324] X2.3/33

14 [0508] [0509] [3325] X2.3/34

15 [0510] [0511] [3326] X2.3/35

16 [0512] [0513] [3327] X2.3/36

17 [0514] [0515] [3328] X2.3/37

18 [0516] [0517] [3329] X2.3/38

19 [0518] [0519] [3330] X2.3/39

20 [0520] [0521] [3331] X2.3/40

21 [0522] [0523] [3332] X2.3/41

22 [0524] [0525] [3333] X2.3/42

23 [0526] [0527] [3334] X2.3/43



Service Manual


2.6.1 Wire fault alarm

The binary inputs of the SYMAP®-family are equipped with a wire fault protection. So the user havethe possibility to supervise the operatability of safety applications.


0055. - BIN.-inputs W.F.-limit :Limit of the wire fault event; remain the level of the binary input under this level, the relatedwire fault event is active (see table 2-8). Default setting: 20 LSB

0076. - BIN.- input low-limit :Upper limit of the input low level; default setting: 150 LSB

0077. - BIN.- input high-limit :Lower limit of the input high level; default setting: 180 LSB

These parameters could only be changed with the parametertool under EXTRAS/SPECIALPARAMETER.

Structure of the wire fault alarm: For a proper working a resistor (10 kΩ) must be installed close to the switching contact of thesupervised line (see figure 2-26).

Figure 2-19 Structure and vol tage level of the wire fault alarm

Functional description: There is a current conduction through the resistor even when the contact –K1 is open which turnedout a voltage level of approx. 3 V to 4 V (30 LSB to 40 LSB) at the binary input. Regarding to theshown parameter settings, this is recognized as a LOW input level. If there is a wire fault at anypart of the line the voltage break down and the related wire fault events (common event [3320] and[33xx]) get active. On the other hand, if the contact –K1 close there is a bypass to the resistor andthe input is recognized as HIGH.

Symap® 1 0 k Ω

- K1

–X2.3/45 (+24 V)

–X2.3/30 -43 (binary input)

-K1 closed

-K1 open

Wire fault

Voltage level(binary inputs)

LSB(ADC)

24 V

17 V

14 V

2 V

0 V

255 LSB

180 LSB

150 LSB

20 LSB

0 LSB

Parameter [0055]

Parameter [0076]

Parameter [0077]



Service Manual


2.7 Analogous Outputs

The basic unit of SYMAP® provides four analogous outputs. For each output, parameters for thefunction, the physical range and calibration are available (see figures 2-27 and 2-28). Incombination with an external board, the number of function outputs can be extended. An extendedboard can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and output channels. The extendedboard is customized to individual client requirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 8analogous outputs 4-20 mA channels.

Figure 2-20 Analogous Outputs -1

Figure 2-21 Analogous Outputs -2

The analogous outputs can be used to convert measuring and processed values to analogousoutputs such as 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. Table 2-9 shows the selection possibilities of analogousoutput function parameters ([0600], [0605], [0610] and [0615]).

ANALOGOUS OUTPUTS

0600. CUR- OUT 1 – f unct i on : U12- VOLT. 0601. – r ange : 4- 20 mA0602. – zero scal e: + 0. 0 %0603. - f ul l scal e: 100. 0 %0604. – adj ust : 100. 0 %0605. CUR- OUT 2 – f unct i on : U- average

0606. – r ange : 4- 20 mA0607. – zero scal e: + 0. 0 %0608. – f ul l scal e: 100. 0 %0609. – adj ust : 100. 0 %0610. CUR- OUT 3 – f unct i on : I 1- cur r ent0611. – r ange : 4- 20 mA

↓ BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

See tabl e 2- 9OFF/ 0- 20 mA/ 4- 20 mA0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %See tabl e 2- 9

OFF/ 0- 20 mA/ 4- 20 mA0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %See tabl e 2- 9OFF/ 0- 20 mA/ 4- 20 mA

ANALOGOUS OUTPUTS↑

0612. – zero scal e: + 0. 0 %0613. - f ul l scal e: 100. 0 %0614. – adj ust : 100. 0 % 0615. CUR- OUT 4 - f unct i on : I - GND1- cur0616. – r ange : 4- 20 mA0617. – zero scal e: + 0. 0 %0618. - f ul l scal e: 100. 0 %0619. – adj ust : 100. 0 %

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %See tabl e 2- 9OFF/ 0- 20 mA/ 4- 20 mA0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %



Service Manual


Table 2-9 Selection possibilities of analogous output function parameters

Function Description

OFF The output is disabledI1-current Actual current of phase 1I2-current Actual current of phase 2

I3-current Actual current of phase 3I-average Average current of phase 1-3U12-Volt Line voltage U1 to U2U23-Volt Line voltage U2 to U3U31-Volt Line voltage U3 to U1U-average Average voltage of all line voltagesU-BUS1 av. Average BUS1 voltage of all line voltagesU-BUS2 av. Average BUS2 voltage of all line voltages

ConstantThe value can be set with the “Adjust” (0-100.0% -> 0-20mA).The “Zero scale” must be set to 0.0%, the “Full scale” must be set to 100.0% and theRange to 0-20mA.

I-GND1-Cur Ground current 1I-GND2-Cur Ground current 2Reserved

UGND1-Volt. Ground voltage 1UGND2-Volt Ground voltage 2Pw Active powerPq Reactive powerNet load Type XG/BCG only: relative net powerSPIreserve Type XG/BCG only: the relative net spinning reservePw-GND1 Active ground power of Ignd1 and Ugnd1Pw-GND2 Active ground power of Ignd2 and Ugnd2Frequency Frequency of feeder systemBUS1-Freq. Frequency of BUS1 systemBUS2-Freq Frequency of BUS2 systemPF pow.fac. Power factor of feeder systemU1-Volt Voltage U1 to groundU2-Volt Voltage U2 to ground

U3-Volt Voltage U3 to groundSpeed ctrl Type XG/BCG only: corresponds to ANSI 15 - speed matching deviceVolt. ctrl Type XG/BCG only: corresponds to ANSI 15 - voltage matching deviceMTU speed MDEC speed (nominal = 3000 rpm)MTU inject MDEC injection quantity (nominal = 100%)MTU T-lube MDEC Temperature lube oil (nominal = 100 °C)MTU T-cool MDEC Temperature coolant (nominal = 100 °C)MTU T-air MDEC Temperature charge air (nominal = 100 °C)MTU T-fuel MDEC Temperature fuel (nominal = 100 °C)MTU T-intc MDEC Temperature coolant intercooler (nominal = 100 °C)MTU P-lube MDEC Pressure lube oil (nominal = 10.0 bar)MTU P-air MDEC Pressure charge air (nominal = 5.0 bar)MTU P-fuel MDEC Pressure fuel (nominal = 15.0 bar)MTU Prfuel

MDEC Pressure fuel rail (nominal = 1600 bar)Speed rpm Type XG/BCG only: the diesel speed in rpmLSsetpoint Type XG/BCG only: the setpoint of the Load sharing controller (see chapter 2.10.3)CAN1 - I

Type XG/BCG only:The generator current, voltage, power and frequencyof the first 6 nodes of the CANBUS1

CAN1 - U

CAN1 - P

CAN1 - fCAN2 - I

CAN2 - U

CAN2 - P

CAN2 - f

CAN3 - I

CAN3 - U

CAN3 - P

CAN3 - fType XG/BCG only:The generator current, voltage, power and frequencyof the first 6 nodes of the CANBUS1

CAN4 - I

CAN4 - U

CAN4 - P

CAN4 - f



Service Manual


CAN5 - I

CAN5 - U

CAN5 - P

CAN5 - f

CAN6 - I

CAN6 - U

CAN6 - P

CAN6 - fPT100-1

The PT100 Analog inputs. All 16 possible inputs from any external board can be selected.The nominal value is assumed as +320°C

PT100-2

PT100-3

PT100-4

PT100-5

PT100-6

PT100-7

PT100-8PT100-9

PT100-10

PT100-11

PT100-12

PT100-13

PT100-14PT100-15

PT100-16

CW sum max The max. phase Contact wear (see ANSI – CW Contact wear measurement).

Each analogous output provides five parameters for adjustment. The following parameters refer toanalogous output 1, which are representative for all analogous outputs.


0600. CUR-OUT 1 - function :

Output selection for analogous output 1 (X2.4 49 and 50)0601. - range :

Selection of the output range: 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or OFF

0602. - zero scale :The zero point adjustment (0 or 4 mA = xx %)

0603. - ful l scale :Full scale adjustment (20 mA = xx %)

0604. - adjust :Total linear scale adjustment (calibration)

Table 2-10 Terminals of analogous outputs

Analogous output Plug - Terminals

1 X2.4 - 49, 50 (+)2 X2.4 - 49, 51 (+)3 X2.4 - 49, 52 (+)4 X2.4 - 49, 53 (+)



Service Manual


2.8 Binary Outputs

The basic unit of SYMAP® provides 12 binary outputs. The outputs are organized as table 2-11. Incombination with an external board, the number of function outputs can be extended. An extendedboard can be connected to SYMAP®, providing additional in and output channels. The extendedboard is customized to individual client requirements and can be equipped to a maximum of 24Relay outputs channels (see chapter 2.8.3).

Table 2-11 Binary outputs

No. Output name Event number Description

1 Shunt #1 [0700]used for breaker trip events

2 Shunt #2 [0701]3 Lockout relay [0702] and [0703] special relay for lock-out purpose4 CB synchron ON [0704] and [0705] used for synchronizing unit5-12 Function 1-8 [0706]-[0720] free programmable outputs

2.8.1 Shunt #1 output

Figure 2-22 Shunt #1


Events 01 to 20 :"HIGH" active events to activate the event [0700]

Event 21 :"HIGH" active event to enable the event [0700]

Event 22 :"LOW" active event to enable the event [0700]

NOTE: The Shunt #1 output is the fastest binary output SYMAP® offers. So it should be used fortime critical operations such as fast protection functions like ANSI 50 to open a circuit

breaker.

BI NARY OUTPUT EVENT – Sel ect : 700

Shunt #1 - X2. 1/ 18, 19Event s:01: 140202: 140503: 140804: 005: 006: 007: 008: 009: 010: 0

≥1 ≥1

11: 012: 013: 014: 015: 016: 017: 018: 019: 020: 0

BACK EXI T

21: 999922: 0

Not e: 0=OFF9999=ON

70

&



Service Manual


2.8.2 Shunt #2 output

Figure 2-23 Shunt #2


Events 01 to 20 :"HIGH" active events to activate the event [0701]

Event 21 :"HIGH" active event to enable the event [0701]

Event 22 :"LOW" active event to enable the event [0701]

21: 999922: 0


Shunt #2 - X2. 1/ 20, 21Event s:01: 002: 003: 004: 005: 006: 007: 008: 009: 010: 0

≥1 ≥1

11: 012: 013: 014: 015: 016: 017: 018: 019: 020: 0

&

Not e: 0=OFF9999=ON

701

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


2.8.3 Lockout relay

The lockout relay is a bistable (two states) relay, which can be used as lockout relay or as anormal binary output (see figure 2-24). If the lockout features are requested please refer to ANSI94 device code to activate the lockout relay (see chapter 3.32).

Figure 2-24 Failure lock out


- Select :Selects a binary output

- Condition :Polarity of the output; if the logic is fulfilled event [0703] will be set.

- Time delay :If the logic is fulfilled and the delay is passed the binary output and event [0702] will be set.

1. Event :to6. Event :Events to activate or to block the output


Lockout rel ay - X2. 1/ 16, 17- Condi t i on : NORM. OPEN- Ti me del ay: 0, 0 sec

1. Event : 02. Event : 03. Event : 04. Event : 05. Event : 9999 0702

6. Event : 0 0703

Not e: 0=OFF, 9999=ONBACK

≥1

&

Set t i ng r ange:

NORM. OPEN/ NORM. CLSD0. 0- 999. 9 sec

EXI T



Service Manual


2.8.4 Synchron ON output

SYMAP® provides a “synchron ON” output used for the synchronizing units to release or block thecircuit breakers during synchronization (see figure 2-25). This output has a redundant. That meanstwo independent controllers of the SYMAP® system have to release with their own relay the“synchron ON” output before the main contact (-X2.1/1,2) will be activated.If no synchronizing unit is in use that means that the following three parameters have been set to“0” (parameter [1000], parameter [1030] and parameter [1060]). This output can be used in thesame way as the Function outputs 1 to 8.

Figure 2-25 Synchron ON



- Condition :Polarity of the output; if the logic is fulfilled event [0705] will be set.

- Time delay :If the logic is fulfilled and the delay is passed the binary output and event [0704] will be set.

1. Event :to6. Event :Events to activate or block the output


CB Synchron ON - X2. 1/ 1, 2- Condi t i on : NORM. OPEN- Ti me del ay: 0, 0 sec

1. Event : 0

2. Event : 03. Event : 04. Event : 05. Event : 9999 07046. Event : 0

0705

Not e: 0=OFF, 9999=ON

⟨1

Set t i ng r ange:

Norm. Open/ Norm. Cl osed0. 0- 999. 9 sec

BACK EXI T

≥1

&



Service Manual


2.8.5 Function outputs

For binary outputs 8 further relay outputs are available (see figure 2-26 and table 2-12).

Figure 2-26 Function outputs



Table 2-12 Parameters of function outputs

Select: Text: Terminal:

[0700] Shunt #1 X2.1/18, 19[0701] Shunt #2 X2.1/20, 21[0702] Lockout relay X2.1/16, 17[0704] CB Synchron ON X2.1/1, 2[0706] Func. 1 X2.1/3, 5[0708] Func. 2 X2.1/4, 5[0710] Func. 3 X2.1/6, 8[0712] Func. 4 X2.1/7, 8[0714] Func. 5 X2.1/9, 11[0716] Func. 6 X2.1/10, 11[0718] Func. 7 X2.1/12, 13[0720] Func. 8 X2.1/14, 15

- Condition :Polarity of the output; if the logic is fulfilled the predelay event will be set.

- Time delay :If the logic is fulfilled and the delay is passed the binary output and the after delay event willbe set.

1. Event :to6. Event :Events to activate or block the output

BI NARY OUTPUT EVENT – Sel ect : 7xx

FUNC. x - X2. 1/ x, y- Condi t i on : Norm. Open- Ti me del ay: 0, 0 sec

1. Event : 02. Event : 03. Event : 04. Event : 05. Event : 9999 7xx6. Event : 0

07xx

Not e: 0=OFF, 9999=ONBACK EXI T

≥1

&

Set t i ng r ange:

Norm. Open/ Nor m. Cl osed0. 0- 999. 9 sec



Service Manual


2.9 Event Bui lder

The event builder offers several possibilities to combine events and to build user definedapplications. The various logic elements can be accessed through the following overview list. Thislist is placed in the menu tree as follows: MENU > SETTING > SYSTEM > Event builder (seefigure 2-27).The first 3 items (Breaker control, Interlock diagrams, Breaker test mode) are linked to the breakercontrol and can not be used for other purposes.The other elements can be used for any applications.

Figure 2-27 Event builder

NOTE: For details refer to the Appendix A2.

EVENT BUI LDERBr eaker cont r olI nt er l ock di agr amsBr eaker t est modeLogi c di agr ams ( 800- 839)AND el ements ( 840- 849)OR el ement s ( 850- 859)

AND / OR ( 860- 869) Ti mer ( 870- 889)Count er ( 890- 894)Fl i p- f l ops ( 895- 899)CAN event s ( 370- 392)

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


2.10 Power management (main menu)

The power management function is an additional software package available only for SYMAP® XG/BCG. If the power management software is loaded, the following parameters are available (seefigure 2-28).

Figure 2-28 Power management (main menu)

POWER MANAGEMENTGeneralPower managementLoad shar i ngFrequency cont r ol l erVol t age r egul at orPower f act or cont r ol l erBi g consumer r equest ( BCR)Bl ackoutDi esel cont r olSt ar t i ng phase

Stoppi ng phasePref erent i al t r i p l i mi t sAddi t i onal l i mi t s

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


2.10.1 General PM Parameter

This group comprises the general settings for power management (see figures 2-29 and 2-30).

Figure 2-29 General settings for power management-1

Figure 2-30 General settings for power management-2


0180. Generator - number :Number of generator; this number is shown in the main page and is used by the power

manager for all event histories to show the user which generator has been started andstopped.

GENERAL PM PARAMETER↑

0194. – 2. event : 5210195. – 3. event : 00196. – 4. event : 00197. Remai n i n manual : NO0198. Secur e f r ont key access : 5120199. St ar t next al ar m bl ock : 02400. Nomi nal power r educt i on : CURR. 32401. – Pn zer o scal e poi nt : 70. 0 %2402. – scal e adj ust ment : 100. 0 %2403. Request own power by : 02404. – power not avai l . event2405. Pr esel ect pr i o. by event : 02406. – pr i or i t y: 12407. Change t o MANUAL mode : 0

2408. Mai npage LS/ PM st atus : NET2409. User access def i ni t i on : none2410. Aut omat i c net sel ect i on : ON

Set t i ng range:

0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number)

0- 9999 ( Event number) NO/ YES0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) OFF/ CURR. 1 – CURR. 40. 00- 100. 0 %50. 0- 150. 0 %0- 9999 ( Event number) - - - ( Event r emi nder )0- 9999 ( Event number) 1- 140- 9999 ( Event number )

NET/ OWNNone/ Pr i o+LoadON/ OFF

BACK EXI T

GENERAL PM PARAMETER

0180. Generat or - number : 010181. – pr i or i t y: 010182. Net sel ect or s - 1. ev. ( L) : 5090183. – 2. ev. ( R) : 00184. Aut omat i c mode : 5110185. St ar t r el ease : 5130186. St ar t next di esel : 00187. Remote st ar t : 5150188. Remot e st op : 5170189. Load bal ance af t er st ar t : 10 sec0190. Mai ns par al l el oper at i on: 0

0191. Manual mode t ype : MANUAL 10192. Pr i or i t y sel ect by event : 5040193. – 1. event : 519 ↓ ↓

Set t i ng range:

1- 141- 140- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 sec0- 9999 ( Event number)

MANUAL 1- 60- 9999 ( Event number) 0- 9999 ( Event number)

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0181. - priori ty :Priority of the diesel generator; the priority is used to define the start and stop sequence forthe power management. The priority is shown in the main page. The priority can also bechanged on the load page or over MODBUS-communication if parameter [0192] is OFF.

0182. Net selector -1.ev.(L) :

0183. -2.ev.(R) :The net selectors define the BUS section to which the circuit breaker of the correspondinggenerator has been connected. A maximum of four BUS sections can be recognized.Example:If a bus tie-breaker is in use the user can link the auxiliary output of the bus tie-breaker witha function input. The event number of this function input has to be used for the net selectorparameter to define the BUS sections (see table 2-13).

NOTE: Please place parameter [2410] on “OFF” when using up to four nets and considerthe description of parameter [2410] when using more than four nets.

Table 2-13 Net selectors

Net selectors

[0183] [0182] Net

inactive inactive 0inactive active 1active inactive 2active active 3

0184. Automatic mode : Automatic mode release; an event number is used to release the automatic mode (e.g. viaa function input).Example: A function input is used to release the automatic mode. If the function input is active the

automatic mode will be automatically set and the user can switch between automatic andmanual. If the function input is inactive the manual mode is fixed and blocked.Event numbers linked to the modes:

• [2905]: manual mode

• [2906]: automatic mode

0185. Start release :Start release of the aggregate; the user can activate an event number to allow the startingof the aggregate (e.g. via a function input).Example:The user can activate a function input to allow the starting. If the function input is active the

starting of the aggregate is allowed. If the function input is inactive all start orders will beblocked and the device will switch to fixed manual mode. In this case event [0185] (“startblock”) will become active. Use this event for an alarm message.

0186. Start next diesel by :The user can start the next aggregate from the start list by event.Example:The user can activate a function input to start an aggregate which is next in the stand-bysequence. If the state of the function input changes to active this aggregate will be started.Only this trigger condition starts the aggregate.



Service Manual


0187.Remote Start :The user can start the own aggregate from remote by an event.Example:The user can activate a function input to start the “own” aggregate from remote. If the stateof the function input changes to active the “own” aggregate will be started. Only this triggercondition starts the aggregate.

0188. Remote Stop :The user can stop the “own” aggregate from remote by an event.Example: The user can activate a function input to stop the “own” aggregate from remote. Ifthe state of the function input changes to active the “own” aggregate will be stopped. Onlythis trigger condition stops the aggregate. This function is independent of PM parameter[0912] (Stop block by event).

0189. Load balance after start :If the power management starts a diesel generator (e.g. big consumer request) then afterthe circuit breaker is switched on, the process will be delayed to balance the load beforethe next action from the power manager happens (e.g. big consumer release).

0190. Mains parallel operation :In case of mains parallel operation, some regulators (e.g. asymmetric load control) haveother conditions. With this event number (e.g. function input), the system recognizes mainsparallel or insulated operation.

0191. Manual mode type :There are several manual mode types available (see table 2-14).

Table 2-14 Automatic/Manual mode funct ions

AUTOMATIC/MANUAL MODE FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONS

AUTO

MATIC

MANUAL MODE

1 2 3 4 5 6

KEYS

BREAKER ON X X X X X

BREAKER OFF X X X X XSTART X X X X XSTOP X X X X XEMERGENCY STOP X X X X X X

START

REMOTE X X X XCOMMUNICATION X X X XPM XNEXT DIESEL XBLACKOUT X

STOPREMOTE X X X X

COMMUNICATION X X X XPM X

CONTROLLER

LOAD SHARING X X X XFREQUENCY X X X XVOLTAGE X X X XPOWER FACTOR X X X X

0192.Priority select by event :With this event the selectors can be enabled. It is not possible to change the priority overanother source (e.g. load page or communication) if the selectors are enabled.

0193. - 1. Event :0194. - 2. Event :

0195. - 3. Event :0196. - 4. Event :

With the four events (e.g. from binary inputs) a priority can be selected (see table 2-15).



Service Manual


Table 2-15 Priority selectors

PRIORITY SELECTORS

EVENTSPRIORITY

[0196] [0195] [0194] [0193]

0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 1 20 0 1 0 30 0 1 1 40 1 0 0 50 1 0 1 60 1 1 0 70 1 1 1 81 0 0 0 91 0 0 1 101 0 1 0 111 0 1 1 121 1 0 0 131 1 0 1 141 1 1 0 -

1 1 1 1 -

0197. Remain in manual :This parameter controls the trigger of the automatic mode:

• “NO”: After an alarm with priority disappears, the mode will switch back to automatic(if automatic was active before the alarm). The mode is stored nonvolatile.

• “YES”: After system start or if an alarm with priority disappears the mode will alwaysremain in manual.

0198. Secure front key access :

With this parameter the access to the START/STOP/AUTO/MANU. – front keys can beprotected with an password (also the Load page – Command window).

• assigned event inactive: free access to the keys

• assigned event active: The keys are protected with Code #1 (see chapter 2.1). Thekeys are released for 30 seconds after the right password isentered.

0199. Start next alarm block :If an alarm with start next priority is active and the event set by parameter [0199] is active astart next command will be given only if the CB is closed or the generator is in AUTO andstarting.



Service Manual


2400. Nominal power reduction :The nominal power reduction can be used for shaft generator operation.This parameter enables the function and selects an analog input (see chapter 2.5).The analog input must be also enabled:

• “Function”: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA

• “Measuring type”: mA• “Full scale”: sets the upper cutoff point of the current signal (e.g. 16.8 mA)

• “Zero scale”: sets the lower cutoff point of the current signal (e.g. 5.8 mA)

2401. - Pn zero scale point :Defines the lowest power value for the nominal power reduction (e.g. 40.0 %)

NOTE: The upper value is always 100.0 %.

2402. - scale adjustment :Linear calibration of the mA-scale between the full and the zero scale; this parameter is

normally set to 100.0%.

Figure 2-31 shows an example for the nominal power reduction.

Figure 2-31 Nominal power reduction

NOTE: On the analog inputs page (MENU > DISPLAY > METERS), the followingnominal power reduction values are shown as:

• the actual mA value, and

• the reduced nominal power in % and in kW

2403. Request own power by :

This function can be used to request the own actual power (in kW) from the net before theown generator is stopped.The event from parameter [2403] activates the request. The function will calculate the loadsituation in the own net, without the power of the own generator (assuming that the owngenerator should be stop). If the future net power reserve is insufficient the function willstart one or more stand-by generator. Finally, if the power reserve is available event [2403]will be activated. This event can be used to trigger a stop (e.g. over parameter [0188]).

2404. - power not avail. Event . This event is related to the function from parameter [2403]. If it is not possible to provide therequested own power from the net (e.g. there are no stand-bys) this event will be activated.It can be used to trigger an alarm.

Pn (%)

mA5.8 16.8

40.0

100.0



Service Manual


2405. Preselect prio. by event :2406. - priori ty :

If the event set on parameter [2405] changes from inactive to active the priority will be setonce to the value of parameter [2406].

2407.Change to MANUAL mode :

If the event set on parameter [2407] changes from inactive to active the mode will bechanged once to MANUAL.

2408. Mainpage LS/PM status :This parameter affects the display of the Load sharing (LS) status and the PowerManagement (PM) status on the main page and the Diesel Overview page:

• “NET”: The status shows the summary of all nodes in the same net.

• “OWN”: The status shows only the own device.

2409. User access defini tion :This parameter defines the possibilities to change the generator priority by the user. If this

parameter is set to “Prio+Load”, the Priority page is not visible in the menu, it is not possibleto give any commands over the Load Command page, and it is not possible to change thepriority through the communication interfaces.

2410. Automatic net selection :“Automatic net selection” can be used up to 4 nets in mode “OFF” and up to 14 nets inmode “ON”.These two kinds of net switching can be selected. Use parameter [2410] „Automatic netselection” to select „ON“ or „OFF“.

• Automatic net selection: „OFF“Two digital inputs can be used for coding the net number.

The position of the bus coupler has to be coded and send to the inputs of SYMAP® devices, parameters [0182] and [0183]. The two parameters [0182] and [0183] arebinary coded, so that four nets (net 0, 1, 2 and 3) can be selected.

Example: There is a net with four generators and a bus coupler between Gen2 andGen3. With closed bus coupler all SYMAP® devices would be selected thenet No. 0. In this case no switching of the nets by the parameters [0182]and [0183] are necessary. If the bus coupler opens, the both „right” handedgenerators must be switched into another net, different from 0. Theauxiliary contact of the bus coupler activates the parameters [0182] in bothSYMAP® devices on the right side. Both SYMAP® devices must be on net1. Thereby the both „right“- and „left“ handed SYMAP® devices are in

different nets and each net for itself controls its own power managementsystem.

• Automatic net selection: “ON”The complete network switching is functioning automatically. Fourteen nets can behanded. Each SYMAP® device gets an input signal from the corresponding left- andright- handed bus coupler. The signal of the left handed bus coupler to the generator isgiven on the parameter [0182] and the signal of the right handed bus coupler on theparameter [0183]. A signal 0 (low) means that the bus coupler is closed. Accordingly a 1 (high) signalmeans that the bus coupler is open.The devices must be numbered in ascending order starting with 1 from „left to the right”

in the CAN1-Identifier (parameter [0310])!!The net numbering starts with the device with CAN1-Identifier [1] and according to thebus couple ring positions it is counted up from 1 to max. 14 “left to right”!



Service Manual


NOTE: If no ring net is present, the device with the CAN1-Identifier [1], the parameter[0182] must be set to 9999 and the SYMAP® device with the last CAN1-

Identifier, the parameter [0183] must be set to 9999 (in this case the buscouplers at both ends are open).

Ring net:

First SAMYP®

device with the CAN1-Identifier [1] has a speciality. If the left bus coupleris closed, all SYMAP® device change to ring net control. Also the last SYMAP® deviceneeds an input of the right bus coupler. The last generator can also have in addition aright handed bus coupler.

NOTE: The SYMAP® device with CAN1-Identifier [1], input left bus coupler (parameter[0182]), connects the system with the last SYMAP® device to a ring net.

If no bus couplers exist, the values of parameters [0182] and [0183] is set to 9999.It is important that the sequence of the generators with the corresponding SYMAP® devices runs with the CAN1-Identifiern from „left to the right” in ascending from oneonwards in a row.

In case of a failure of one SYMAP®

device, the power management can be furtheroperated, because the bus coupler feedbacks are given in each device to the twosurround SYMAP® devices. In this case the event [3019] „CAN1 node error” isactivated on all devices.The feedback of the bus is also monitored. In case of differences in the position of thebus coupler the event [2410] with an announcement “Auto. Net error” will be activated.The events [2410] and [3019] can be directed to an alarm channel for signalling.

Figure 2-32 Power Management System for max. 14 Generators in one line and r ing net(Automatic net selection: “ ON” )

[0183] [0182] [0183] [0183][0182]

G

[0182]

[0310] = 1

G

[0310] = 2

G

[0310] = 3

G

[0182] [0183]

[0310] = 14

Cable

Cable1 2 14 3 ...

TB TB

TBTB

TB

SYMAP

®

SYMAP

®

SYMAP

®

SYMAP

®



Service Manual


2.10.2 Power management

The power management parameters offer two main functionalities (philosophies) for the load-depending starting and stopping within a BUS section. Each function can be activatedindependently of the other one (but it is advisable to decide for only one).

• The first function (parameters [0900] to [0917]) is operating on several limits for starting andstopping (classical P.M.).

• Within the second function (parameters [2430] to [2449]), up to eight load ranges can bedefined. For every load range a combination of up to five generators (priorities) can bedefined, which should be connected to the BUS. The system will manage to start and/orstop the generator according to the load ranges.

Figure 2-33 Power mamagement-1


POWER MANAGEMENT↑

0912. – bl ock by event : 5100913. – r emai ni ng l oad : 60. 0 %0914. – r emai ni ng cur r . : 60. 0 %0915. del ay: 300 sec0916. St op wi t hout r unn. down : NO0917. Bl ock own st art by event : 00918. Pr i o. shi f t er wor k count : 0 h

2430. LOAD RANGES - by event : 5072431. - change t o upper r ange: 3 sec2432. - change t o l ower r ange: 100 sec2433. - l oad r ange hyster esi s: 2. 5 % ↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 ( Event number )0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 secNO/ YES0- 9999 ( Event number )0- 65535 h

0- 9999 ( Event number )0- 9999 sec0- 9999 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %

POWER MANAGEMENT

0900. P. M. – swi t ch by event : 00901. – char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF

0902. START – check l i mi t s : SI NGLE0903. – 1. l oad l i mi t : 70. 0 %0904. - del ay: 200 sec0905. – 2. l oad l i mi t : 90. 0 %0906. - del ay: 30 sec0907. – l ow f r equency : 58. 00 Hz0908. – del ay: 5 sec0909. – hi gh cur r ent : 70. 0 %0910. - del ay: 200 sec0911. STOP - wi t h pr i or i t y : LOW ↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 ( Event number )ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON

SI NGLE/ AVERAGE0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 sec0. 00- 999. 99 Hz0- 9999 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 secLOW/ HI GH



Service Manual




0900. P.M. - switch by event :Event switch for the first power management function; this switch affects only theparameters [0901] to [0917]. All devices in one net must have this switch enabled foractivation!

0901. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of power management ON/OFF switch parameter [0900]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If event of PM-switch is active power management will be switched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If event of PM-switch is active power management will be switched on.

0902. START - check limits :Checking single or average start limits this parameter is valid for [0903], [0905] and [0909]. All limits can be disabled by setting them to zero.

• “SINGLE”: When passing limit parameters [0903], [0905] or [0909] the start orderwill be given depending on the load/current of each diesel engine. If a

generator passes the limit while the others do not a start order will begiven.

• “AVERAGE”: Start order given if average load/current of parameter [0903], [0905] or[0909] is passed. Average load/current means the average ofload/current of all diesel engines running on the mains in one net.

0903. - 1. load limit :First start limit for load-depending start of an additional diesel engine

0904. - delay :Delay time for first start limit parameter [0903]

0905. - 2.load limit :Second start limit for load-depending start of an additional diesel engine

POWER MANAGEMENT↑

2434. - 1. l oad r ange < 730 kW2435. - pr i or i t y: 12436. - 2. l oad r ange < 1060 kW2437. - pr i or i t y: 2

2438. - 3. l oad r ange < 1790 kW2439. - pr i or i t y: 1 22440. - 4. l oad r ange < 2130 kW2441. - pr i or i t y: 2 32442. - 5. l oad r ange < 2850 kW2443. - pr i or i t y: 1 2 32444. - 6. l oad r ange < 60000 kW2445. - pr i or i t y: 1 2 3 42446. - 7. l oad r ange < 0 kW2447. - pr i or i t y: 12448. - 8. l oad r ange < 0 kW2449. - pr i or i t y: 1

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”0- 65535 kW“1”…”1 2 3 4 5”



Service Manual


0906. - delay :Delay time for second start limit parameter [0905]

0907. - low frequency :Passage of a low frequency limit also starts a diesel engine. Coordinate with parameters[2007] and [2010]

0908. - delay :Delay time for low frequency start limit parameter [0907]

0909. - high current :Start limit for current-depending start of an additional diesel engine

0910. - delay :Delay time for current start limit parameter [0909]

0911. STOP - with priori ty :Sequence for stop order.

• “LOW”: Load-depending stop works in a sequence so that the aggregate with thelowest priority will be stopped first.

• “HIGH”: Load-depending stop works in a sequence so that the aggregate with thehighest priority will be stopped first.

0912. - block by event :By activating this event, load-depending stop of the diesel engines in the same main can beblocked.

0913. - remaining load :Stop limit for load-depending stop of operating diesel engine; the entered percentage limit

is the load value remaining on the mains after disconnecting the diesel engine.

0914. - remaining curr. :Stop limit for current-depending stop of operating diesel engine; the entered percentagelimit is the current value remaining on the mains after disconnecting the diesel engine. Ifzero is settled the limit check will be disabled.

0915. - delay :Delay time for current and load stop limit parameters [0913] and [0914]; note that bothconditions must be fulfilled to start the delay. If only load stop is to be used the current limit[0914] must be set to zero. Both limits can be disabled by setting them to zero if PM-stop isnot to be used. Current stop [0914] is only available in connection with load stop, never

alone.

0916. Stop without run. down :If this parameter is set to “YES” the stopped generator will only open the CB (after loadreduction) and than remain running.

0917. Block own start by event :By activating this event, the start of the own diesel engine through the power managementsystem can be blocked. The blocking does not affect other start sources (e.g. blackout, startnext…). A message will be displayed on the power management page if the blocking isactive.



Service Manual


0918. Prio. shifter work count :If on any net node parameter [0918] is set and the work hours are reached by that node,the priorities will be rotated on every node in that net, regardless of parameter [0918] and astart next will be issued. The counting value (work hours) is stored novolatile. This functioncan be activated also on the priority page (MENU > SETTING > PRIORITY).

2430.LOAD RANGES - by event :Event switch for the second power management function; this switch affects only theparameters [2431] to [2449]. All devices in one net must have this switch enabled foractivation!

2431. - change to upper range :If the actual net power changes from one range to a higher range the higher range will betaken as the valid range after this delay time has passed.

2432. - change to lower range :If the actual net power changes from one range to a lower range the lower range will betaken as the valid range after this delay time has passed.

2433. - load range hysteresis :This hysteresis is valid if the actual net power changes from one range to a higher range.The power must fall below this hysteresis in order to return to the previous (lower) range.

2434. - 1. load range <2435. - priori ty :

to2448. - 8. load range <2449. - priori ty :

With this parameters up to eight ranges can be defined. Each range starts at the previousrange and ends at the settled kW value. For every range up to five generators (identified in

the net by the priorities) can be assigned, which should be connected to the BUS.

NOTE: The starting and stopping will begin when a new range becomes valid (after thedelays parameters [2431] or [2432] are passed). The system will first start all the neededgenerators. After all the needed generators are connected to the BUS, the system willbegin to stop the unnecessary generator. If one generator needed for the actual load rangeis not available (in MANUAL and stopped) the system will search for another generator withthe same nominal power. If the search is without result the next stand-by generator will bestarted. The stopping is blocked in this case. The system will start or stop only generatorswhich priority is defined in one of the load ranges (parameters [2435] … [2449]).The stopping is automatically blocked if the PM stop is blocked (see parameter [0912]) or ifa “big consumer request” is active in the net (see chapter 2.10.7).

If parameter [2430] is settled to a value greater than zero supervision becomes active. Thissupervision checks if all the generators defined within the parameters [2435] … [2449] areavailable (in AUTOM.). In this case event [2430] will be active. Event [2431] will be active ifparameter [2430] is set (to a value greater zero) and the generators needed for the actualrange are all in AUTOM.This events can be used for alarming or to control processes (e.g. to switch to the classicalPM if generators are not available).



Service Manual


2.10.3 Load sharing

The load sharing parameter includes the settings that regulate the load within the BUS section(see figures 2-43 and 2-44). The load sharing regulator works as a three-point controller. After acertain break time, the difference between the load set point and the actual measured load valuewill be calculated. With this load difference the pulse time for speed higher and lower will becalculated. The set point in the symmetrical load sharing mode for the load regulator is the averagenet load. The set point in the asymmetrical load sharing mode is parameter [0934]). If the loaddifference (set point to actual load) is lower then the dead band the load sharing regulator isblocked.

Figure 2-36 Load sharing-1

Figure 2-37 Load sharing-2

LOAD SHARI NG↑

0937. – r ange maxi mum : 90 %0938. – next at t empt : 60 sec0939. Al l owed l oad di f f er ence: 20. 0 %0940. – del ay : 60 sec0941. REGUL. - swi t ch by event : 00942. – 2. br eak t i me : 0. 0 sec0943. – 2. pul se t i me : 0. 0 sec0944. ASY. setpoi nt swi t ch by: 02490. PTI mode - shaf t gen. : 0

2491. - DG max. l i mi t : 0 %2492. - del ay: 0 sec2493. PULSE/ PAUSE - di f f . l i mi t : 0. 0 %2494. - pul se t i me: 0. 0 sec2495. - pause t i me: 0. 0 sec2496. - bl ock by : 0 ev.2497. Al l owed l oad di f f . 2. l i m. : 0. 0 %2498. - del ay: 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 200 %0- 9999 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 sec0- 9999 ( Event number )0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 ( Event number )0- 9999 ( Event number )

0- 9999 %0- 9999 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 ( Event number )0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 sec

BACK EXI T

LOAD SHARI NG

0925. SYM. – swi t ch by event : 00926. – char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF0927. – br eak t i me : 3. 0 sec0928. - pul se t i me : 3. 0 sec

0929. – deadband : 2. 0 %0930. – hi gher event0931. – l ower event0932. ASYM. – swi t ch by event : 5010933. - char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF0934. – set poi nt : 80 %0935. – anal og i nput : OFF0936. – r ange mi ni mum : 40 % ↓

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 ( Event number )ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec

0. 0- 999. 9 sec- - - ( Event r emi nder )- - - ( Event r emi nder )0- 9999 ( Event number )ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON0- 200 %OFF/ CURR. 1- 4/ Net CUR. 1- 40- 200 %

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



0925. SYM. - switch by event :ON/OFF switch of load sharing function; all devices in one net must have this switchenabled for activation!

0926. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of load sharing ON/OFF switch parameter [0925]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If event of load sharing switch is active load sharing function will beswitched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If event of load sharing switch is active load sharing function will beswitched on.

0927. - break time :Typical setting: 2 secThe cycle time for the calculation of the pulse times for speed adjustment during loadsharing is set here. At the end of the break time, the load sharing controller will calculate

and set the next pulse (see parameter [0928]).

0928. -pulse time :The pulse characteristic for POWER adjustment during load sharing is set here. This timedefines the pulse time which corresponds to 100% POWER difference between POWERSET POINT Pset and ACTUAL POWER VALUE Pact. The “Calc. pulse (sec)” is modified bythe POWER difference in the following way:

Calc. pulse (sec) = Parameter [0928] / 100 × ΔP (%)

with:Parameter [0928]: defined pulse time at 100% power difference,

ΔP (%) = Pset (%) – Pact (%) Example: Typical Setting: 100 sec

Parameter [0928] = 100 sec means:If the POWER difference between POWER SET POINT and ACTUAL POWERVALUE is 100% a calc. pulse of 100 seconds will be set.If the POWER difference is 1% then a calc. pulse of 1 sec will be set.If the POWER difference is positive (Pset > Pact) the n > event [0930] will beactivated for the calc. pulse time.If the POWER difference is negative (Pset < Pact) the n < event [0931] will beactivated for the calc. pulse time.

0929. - deadband :Deadband of the regulator; if the load difference ΔP (%) = Pset (%) – Pact (%) (set point Pset minus actual measured load of the generator Pact) is under the deadband limit the regulatoris idle.

0930. -higher event . Event for speed higher control; this event will be set by the system in case the pulse time ofthe regulator is active in combination with the demand to increase the speed. This eventcan be used to activate a function output.

0931. - lower event . Event for speed lower control; this event will be set by the system in case the pulse time of

the regulator is active in combination with the demand to decrease the speed. This eventcan be used to activate a function output.



Service Manual


0932.AYM. - switch by event :Special application for load sharing regulator; ON/OFF switch of asymmetrical load sharingfunction; the function for this asymmetrical mode for the load sharing regulator can beswitched on and off by setting this event.In the asymmetrical load sharing mode, the regulator uses a fixed-load set point parameter[0934], instead of the average net load. The asymmetrical load mode is allowed if a

minimum of two generator sets feeding the BUS and the load limits of parameters [0936]and [0937] are not exceeded. In case of mains parallel operation parameter [0190],asymmetrical load sharing mode is always allowed.

0933. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of asymmetrical load sharing ON/OFF switch parameter [0932]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If the event of the asymmetrical load sharing switch set in parameter[0932] is active asymmetrical load sharing function will be switched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If the event of the asymmetrical load sharing switch set in parameter[0932] is active asymmetrical load sharing function will be switched on.

0934. - setpoint :Set point for the asymmetrical load sharing regulator; the range for this set point is0-200% of the nominal load of the generator. This parameter can be changed also on theload page (Asymm. load).

0935. - analog input :Refer to chapter 2.5 to enable the selected analog input.

NOTE: If this parameter is enabled the setpoint of parameter [0934] is inactive.

• “CURR.1 - CURR.4”: Analogous setpoint for the asymmetrical load sharingregulator; the set point for asymmetrical load limit can be set

by the analogous input. One of the four analogous inputs ofthe basic unit can be used to modify the setpoint for theasymmetrical load sharing.

• “Net CUR.1 - Net CUR.4”: The setpoint for this mode is zero and the actual value is theanalog value. The analog value will be regulated to zero (sothe analog value equals the regulator difference). Theregulator direction for this mode is always UP (speedhigher), in order that the generator should overtake the netpower.

0936. - range minimum :0937. - range maximum :

Minimum and maximum limit for the asymmetrical load sharing mode; if the asymmetricalload sharing is switched on Parameters [0932] and [0933] and if the load of the othergenerators feeding the same BUS is within the minimum and maximum range limit then theasymmetric mode will be allowed.

0938. - next attempt :If the asymmetrical load sharing mode is active and one of the other generators that isfeeding the same BUS exceeds the limits of parameters [0936] and [0937] then the loadsharing mode is switching from asymmetric to symmetrical load sharing mode. After thedelay time set in parameter [0938], the load sharing regulator tries to switch again into theasymmetrical load sharing mode.

0939. Allowed load dif ference :If the difference from the set point to the measured generator load exceeds this limit thenevent [0939] will be activated (DNV load sharing supervision rule).



Service Manual


0940. - delay :Delay time for parameter [0939]; use this event [0940] to activate an alarm channel.

0941.REGUL. - switch by event :With this function the load sharing regulator can be switched to another break and pulsetime. This can be used to change the regulator characteristic for different operations.

0942. - 2. break time :This second break time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0941] is active(Refer to parameter [0927]).

0943. - 2. pulse time :This second pulse time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0941] is active(Refer to parameter [0928]).

0944. ASY. setpoint switch by :With this event switch it is possible to switch between the two setpoint sources (fixedsetpoint parameter [0934] or an analog input parameter [0935]) for the asymmetrical load

controller.If the event set by parameter [0944] is active and parameter [0935] is set the value from theanalog input is the setpoint for the ASY.L.S. Otherwise parameter [0934] is the setpoint.

2490. PTI mode - shaft gen. :This event switch activates the PTI (Power Take In) mode. The PTI mode is a special Loadcontrol mode, which can be used to force a shaft generator on a ship to run as a motor, inorder to make the ship faster.This switch must be activated only at the device which controls the shaft generator. Toactivate the PTI mode, all devices in one net must have also the main Load sharing switchenabled (see parameter [0925]). If this switch becomes active the reverse power protection(see chapter 3.6: ANSI 32) on the shaft generator is blocked and all other generators in the

same net are running in parallel to the shaft generator the asym. L.S. switch (seeparameter [0932]) has no function if the PTI mode is active.There are two modes possible if the PTI mode is active. The PTI mode always starts withthe default mode 3:

• “MODE 3”: The shaft generator is running as a motor with constant(asym.) reverse power. The setpoint is taken and calculatednegative from the asym. load sharing.The other generators in the same net are running in parallelwith variable (sym.) load sharing.

• “MODE 4”: The shaft generator is running as a motor with variablereverse load sharing the power from the parallel generatorwith other consumers. The setpoint is the own load, so noregulation is active for the shaft generator. The othergenerators in the same net are running in parallel withconstant (asym.) load. The setpoint is taken from the asym.load sharing.

There is an automatic switching between the two modes:

• “MODE 3 -> MODE 4”: If one of the parallel generators exceeds the DG max. limit(see parameter [2491]) and the delay is passed (seeparameter [2492]) all generators in the same net will switch tomode 4.

• “MODE 4 -> MODE 3”: If the shaft generator exceeds the setpoint for the asym. loadsharing and the delay is passed (see parameter [2492]) allgenerators in the same net will switch back to mode 3. The



Service Manual


actual power of the shaft generator and the setpoint for theasym. load sharing are taken as absolute values for thecomparison.

NOTE: The asym. L.S. range supervision (see parameters [0936] and [0937]) is disabled ifthe PTI mode is active.

2491. - DG max.limit :The parallel generators will supervise this limit for switching from mode 3 to 4.

2492. - delay :Time delay for switching between the two modes

2493. PULSE/PAUSE - dif f. limit :This function gives a constant pulse/pause time for the load control. If the actual controllerdifference exceeds the limit of parameter [2493] the PULSE/PAUSE -function gets active.The function works in all load sharing modes (SYM. and ASYM.). The function is switchedoff by setting parameter [2493] to zero.

2494. - pulse time :This parameter defines the definite length of the pulse time for the load control, and inaddition for the load reduction control of the stopping phase (see parameter [0665]).

2495. - pause time :This parameter defines the definite length of the pause time for the load control, and inaddition for the load reduction control of the stopping phase (sees parameter [0665]).

2496. - block by :This function can be blocked by an event number.

2497. Allowed load dif f.2.lim. :Second limit for the load difference. If the difference from the set point to the measuredgenerator load exceeds this limit, then event [2498] will be activated after the setted delayhas passed (DNV load sharing supervision rule). Event [2497] is never active. Only event[2498] will be active on the device (not in the net) if the limit is reached and the delay ispassed.

2498. - delay :Delay time for parameter [2498]; use this event [2498] to activate an alarm channel.

NOTE: The Allowed load diff. functions (parameter [0939] or [2497]) are blocked, if “Loadbalance after start” (parameter [0189]) is active.



Service Manual


2.10.4 Frequency controller

The frequency controller parameter contains the settings for regulating the frequency within theBUS section (see figure 2-38). The frequency controller works as a three-point controller. After acertain break time, the difference between the frequency set point and the actual measuredfrequency will be calculated. With this frequency difference, the pulse time for the speed controlwill be calculated. The set point for the frequency controller will be calculated from the frequency-load static given by the parameter: idle and full-load frequency. If the frequency difference (setpoint to actual measured frequency) is lower then the deadband limit then the frequency controllerwill be blocked.

Figure 2-38 Frequency controller


0945. - switch by event :ON/OFF switch of frequency control function; all devices in one net must have this switchenabled for activation!

0946. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of frequency control ON/OFF switch parameter [0945]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If event of parameter [0945] is activated the frequency controller will beswitched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If event of parameter [0945] is activated the frequency controller will beswitched on.

0947. - idle speed :0948. - ful l load :

Set point for frequency control; either a constant frequency (for this, enter the same value inboth parameters [0947] and [0948]) or a load depending speed droop can be entered in

accordance with the speed controller of the diesel engine.

FREQUENCY CONTROLLER

0945. – swi t ch by event : 00946. – char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF0947. – i dl e speed : 61. 00 Hz0948. - f ul l l oad : 59. 00 Hz

0949. – br eak t i me : 20. 0 sec0950. – pul se t i me : 100. 0 sec0951. – deadband : 0. 2 %0952. – hi gher event0953. – l ower event0954. RANGE – maxi mum : 58. 00 Hz0955. – mi ni mum : 62. 00 Hz0956. REGUL. - swi t ch by event : 00957. – 2. br eak t i me : 0. 0 sec2420. – 2. pul se t i me : 0. 0 sec2421. REMOTE – hi gher event : 02422. – l ower event : 0

2423. SETPOI NT anal og i nput : OFFEXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 ( Event number )ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON0. 00- 999. 99 Hz0. 00- 999. 99 Hz

0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %- - - ( Event r emi nder )- - - ( Event r emi nder )0. 00- 999. 99 Hz0. 00- 999. 99 Hz0- 9999 ( Event number )0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 ( Event number )0- 9999 ( Event number )

OFF/ CURR. 1- 4BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0949. - break time :Typical setting: 2 secThe cycle time for the calculation of the pulse times for speed adjustment during frequencycontrolling is set here. At the beginning of the break time, the frequency controller willcalculate and set the next pulse (see parameter [0950]).

0950. - pulse time :The pulse characteristic for frequency adjustment during frequency controlling is set here.This time defines the pulse time which corresponds to 100% frequency difference. The calc.pulse is modified by the difference between the two frequency inputs in the following way:

Calc. pulse (sec) = Parameter [0950] / 100 × ΔF (%)

with:Parameter [0950]: defined pulse time at 100% frequency difference,ΔF (%): frequency difference between FEEDER and BUS1 in percent of nominal

Example: Typical Setting: 100 sec Parameter [0950] = 100 sec means:

If the frequency difference between FEEDER and BUS1 is 100% a calc. pulseof 100 seconds will be set.If the frequency difference is 0.5 Hz (1% at 50 Hz nominal-rated frequency)then a calc. pulse of 1 sec will be set.If the frequency difference is positive (FFEEDER > FBUS1) the n < event [0953] willbe activated for the calc. pulse time.If the frequency difference is negative (FFEEDER < FBUS1) the n > event [0952] willbe activated for the calc. pulse time.

0951. - deadband :Deadband of the controller; if the frequency difference (set point to actual measuredfrequency the generator) is under the deadband limit the controller will be blocked.

0952. - higher event . Event for speed higher control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator isactive in combination with the demand to increase the speed. Use this event to activate afunction output.

0953. - lower event .. Event for speed lower control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator isactive in combination with the demand to decrease the speed. Use this event to activate afunction output.

0954. RANGE - maximum :

0955. - minimum :Operating range for frequency controller, load sharing and load reduction; if the frequencyof the BUS exceeds the frequency range given by these parameters then these functionswill be blocked.

0956. REGUL. - switch by event :With this function the frequency regulator can be switched to another break and pulse time.This can be used to change the regulator characteristic for different operations.

0957. - 2. break time :This second break time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0956] is active(Refer to parameter [0949]).

2420. - 2. pulse time :This second pulse time is valid for the regulator if the event from parameter [0956] is active(Refer to parameter [0950]).



Service Manual


2421. REMOTE - higher event :2422. - lower event :

Over this events the speed can be remotely controlled (e.g. over binary inputs orcommunication).

2423. SETPOINT analog input :

This parameter enables the frequency controller setpoint over an analog input. The analoginput must be enabled and the measure type of the analog input must be set to [%] (seechapter 2.5), otherwise the setpoint will be calculated from P[0947] and P[0948]. Thesetpoint will be calculated from the nominal frequency parameter [0203]. The full and zeroscale of the analog input will act as a limitation.



Service Manual


The figure 2-39 shows the frequency band, including the common limit values and thecorresponding restriction, of the frequency controller. When a frequency static is defined(parameter [0947] for idle frequency and parameter [0948] for full-load frequency), then the setpoint of the controller will depend on the actual load, which is shown with the x-axis of the diagram.

Parameter Frequency

[2005]or f>> stop [0264] engine

overspeed

[0682] f> BUS abnormal

[2002] f> alarm [ANSI 59_1]

[0954] f>operating limit

[0947] F0

[0203] FNominal

[0948] f full load

[0955] F<operating limit

[0908] F< (PM) start standbydiesel

[2008] F< alarm [ANSI 81_1]

[0679] f< preferential tr ip

[0683] f< BUS abnormal

[2011] f<< trip breaker [ANSI 81_2]

Figure 2-39 Frequency contro l area

Synchronizingblocked

Sychronizingblocked

100%

Off withload reduction

PW

Operating area forfrequency control &load sharing

Frequency-static(Droop)



Service Manual


2.10.5 Voltage regulator

The voltage regulator parameter contains the settings for regulating the voltage within the BUSsection (see figure 2-47). The voltage regulator works as a three-point controller. After a certainbreak time the difference between the voltage set point and the actual measured voltage will becalculated. With this voltage difference, the pulse time for the voltage regulator will be calculated. Ifthe voltage difference (set point to actual measured voltage) is lower then the dead-band limit thenthe voltage regulator will be blocked.

Figure 2-40 Voltage regulator


0958. - switch by event :ON/OFF switch of voltage regulator function; all devices in one net must have this switchenabled for activation!

0959. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of voltage regulator ON/OFF switch parameter [0958]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If event of parameter [0958] is activated the voltage regulator will beswitched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If event of parameter [0958] is activated the voltage regulator will beswitched on.

0960. - setpoint :Set point for voltage regulator

0961. - break time :Break time for the voltage regulator; the break time is the interval time for the controller. Atthe beginning of the break time, the pulse duration for the voltage control will be calculatedand started.

VOLTAGE REGULATOR

0958. – swi t ch by event : 10000959. – char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF0960. – set poi nt : 100. 0 %0961. – br eak t i me : 4. 0 sec0962. – pul se t i me : 3. 0 sec0963. – deadband : 2. 0 %

0964. – hi gher event0965. – l ower event0966. REMOTE – hi gher event : 00967. – l ower event : 00968. SETPOI NT anal og i nput : OFF

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 ( event number )ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %

0- 9999 ( event number )0- 9999 ( event number )OFF/ CURR. 1- 4

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0962. - pulse time :Pulse time of the voltage regulator; the pulse time depends on the difference between theset point and the actual measured voltage of the generator. The voltage control events[0964] and [0965] will be activated as long as the pulse time is running. The pulse time willbe calculated as follows:

Pulse time = voltage difference * Parameter [0962] / 100

Set this parameter to the max. time the generator needs to reach the setpoint.

0963. - deadband :Deadband of the controller; if the voltage difference (set point to actual measured generatorvoltage) is under the deadband limit the controller will be blocked.

0964. - higher event . Event for voltage higher control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator isactive in combination with the demand to increase the voltage of the generator. This eventis used to activate a function output.

0965. - lower event.

Event for voltage lower control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the regulator isactive in combination with the demand to decrease the voltage of the generator. This eventis used to activate a function output.

0966. REMOTE - higher event :0967. - lower event :

Over this events the voltage can be remotely controlled (e.g. over binary inputs, orcommunication).

0968. SETPOINT analog input :This parameter enables the voltage regulator setpoint over an analog input. The analog

input must be enabled and the measure type of the analog input must be set to [%],otherwise parameter [0960] will be taken as the valid setpoint. The setpoint will becalculated from the nominal voltage parameter [0201]. The full and zero scale of the analoginput works as a limitation.



Service Manual


Figure 2-41 shows the voltage band, including the common limit values and the correspondingrestriction of the voltage regulator.

Parameter Voltage

[1606] U>>trip breaker [ANSI 59_2]

[0684] U>abnormal

[1602] U>alarm [ANSI 59_1]

[0201] UN

[1102] U< alarm [ANSI 27_1]

[0685] U<abnormal

[1104] U<< trip breaker [ANSI 27_2]

Figure 2-41 Voltage regulator area



Operating area forvoltage regulator



Service Manual


2.10.6 Power factor controller

The parameters of the power factor contain the settings for balancing the reactive power loadwithin the BUS section (see figure 2-42). The power factor controller works as a three-pointcontroller. After a certain break time, the difference between the power factor set point and theactual measured power factor will be calculated. With this power factor difference, the pulse timefor voltage higher and lower control will be calculated. The set point for the power factor regulatoris the average net reactive power when the generators are operating in symmetrical load sharingmode. When the generators are in the asymmetrical load sharing mode, the set point for the powerfactor regulation is fixed by the setting of parameter [0979]. If the power difference (set point toactual power factor) is lower then the deadband then power factor control is blocked.

Figure 2-42 Power factor controller


0970. SYM. - switch by event :ON/OFF switch of power factor control function; all devices in one net must have this switchenabled for activation!

0971. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of power factor control ON/OFF switch parameter [0970]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If the switch event of parameter [0970] turns to active power factorcontrol function will be switched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If the switch event of power factor control turns to active power factorcontrol function will be switched on.

0972. - break time :Break time for the power factor controller; the break time is the interval time for thecontroller. At the beginning of the break time, the pulse duration for the power factor controlwill be calculated and started.

POWER FACTOR CONTROLLER

0970. SYM. – swi t ch by event : 00971. – char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF

0972. – br eak t i me : 5. 0 sec0973. - pul se t i me : 3. 0 sec0974. – deadband : 2. 0 %0975. – hi gher event0976. – l ower event0977. ASYM. – swi t ch by event : 00978. – char act er i st i c : ON- >OFF0979. – set poi nt : 0. 80 cap0980. Cont r ol l er condi t i on : CAP0981. Act i vat i on cur r ent l i mi t : 0 %

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON

0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %

0- 9999ON- >OFF/ OFF- >ON0. 00- 9. 99 capCAP/ I ND0- 9999 %



Service Manual


0973. - pulse time :Pulse time of the power factor controller; the pulse time depends on the difference betweenthe set point and the actual measured power factor of the generator. The voltage controlevents [0975] and [0976] will be activated as long as the pulse time is running. Voltagecontrol event [0975] is to increase the voltage (increase the ind. load) and event [0976] todecrease the voltage (increase the capacitive load). The pulse time will be calculated as

follows:Pulse time = power factor difference * Parameter [0973] / 100

Set this parameter to the max. time the generator needs to reach the nominal voltage.

0974. - deadband :Deadband of the controller; if the power factor difference (set point to actual measuredpower factor of the generator) is under the deadband limit the controller will be blocked.

0975. - higher event . Event for voltage higher control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the controlleris active in combination with the demand to increase the voltage. This event should be usedto activate a function output. See parameter [0980] to invert this event.

0976. - lower event . Event for voltage lower control; this event will be set when the pulse time of the controller isactive in combination with the demand to decrease the voltage. This event should be usedto activate a function output. See parameter [0980] to invert this event.

0977. ASYM. - switch by event :Special application for power factor controller; ON/OFF switch of asymmetrical power factorfunction; the function for this asymmetrical mode for the power factor controller can beswitched on and off by activating this event.

In the asymmetrical mode the power factor controller uses a fixed power factor set pointparameter [0979], instead of the average power factor of the net. The asymmetrical PFmode is allowed if at minimum two generator sets feed the BUS.

0978. - characterist ic :Switch characteristic of asymmetrical power factor ON/OFF switch parameter [0977]:

• “ON -> OFF”: If event of asymmetrical power factor turns to active asymmetrical powerfactor function will be switched off.

• “OFF -> ON”: If event of asymmetrical power factor turns to active asymmetrical loadpower factor function will be switched on.

0979. - setpoint :Set point for the asymmetrical power factor controller; the range for this set point is0-100, which is equal to a power factor of 0.00-1.00 (ind). This parameter can be changedalso on the load page (Asym. PF).

0980. Controller condit ion :This parameter defines the regulator direction of the power factor controller (both thesymmetrical and the asymmetrical). It simply inverts the output events [0975] and [0976].

0981. Activation current limit :With this parameter a activation limit for the sym. and the asym. controller can be set. Thelimit refers to the measured generator average current. The other nodes will continue

regulating without the deactivate node. This parameter can be disabled by setting it to zero.



Service Manual


2.10.7 Big consumer request (BCR)

Within the power management function a load controller is available to manage big consumerrequests (see figure 2-43). The load controller parameters contain the settings for the request andthe control and the release of big consumers within the same BUS section. A maximum of 14 bigconsumers are managed by one device. After the request of a big consumer, the system checksthe spinning reserve (valid load) of the corresponding net. Depending on the value of the spinningreserve, the load controller will start another diesel aggregates or release the big consumerdirectly. As long as the big consumer request is active, load depending stop of the powermanagement will be blocked.

Figure 2-43 Big consumer request (BCR)-1


BI G CONSUMER REQUEST ( BCR)↑

0995. – r eserved :0996. REQUEST 4 by event : 00997. – r equest ed l oad : 0 kW0998. – anal og f eedback: OFF0999. – r eserved :2370. REQUEST 5 by event : 02371. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2372. REQUEST 6 by event : 02373. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2374. REQUEST 7 by event : 0

2375. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW↓ BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 99990- 65000 kWOFF/ CURR. 1- 4

0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 9999

0- 65000 kW

BI G CONSUMER REQUEST ( BCR)

0984. REQUEST 1 by event : 5110985. – r equest ed l oad : 655 kW0986. – anal og f eedback: OFF0987. – r eserved :

0988. REQUEST 2 by event : 5130989. – r equest ed l oad : 850 kW0990. – anal og f eedback: OFF0991. – r eserved :0992. REQUEST 3 by event : 00993. – r equest ed l oad : 0 kW0994. – anal og f eedback: OFF

↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 99990- 65000 kWOFF/ CURR. 1- 4

0- 99990- 65000 kWOFF/ CURR. 1- 4

0- 99990- 65000 kWOFF/ CURR. 1- 4



Service Manual



The load controller of the system operates in the following way: After a consumer request, the loadcontroller evaluates the load of the BUS section, in which the consumer has been requested.Depending on the load situation, the load controller will release the big consumer directly or after ithas started one or more engines.The following parameter description refers to Big Consumer Request 1, since each consumerrequests (1-14) have similar parameters with the exception of the event numbers.The Big Consumer Requests 5-14 have no analog feedbacks.

Release events for Big Consumer Requests 1-4: event numbers: 984,988,992,996.Release events for Big Consumer Requests 5-14: even event numbers: 2370 – 2388.

Not available events for Big Consumer Requests 1-4: event numbers: 986,990,994,998.Not available events for Big Consumer Requests 5-14: odd event numbers: 2371 – 2389.


0984. REQUEST 1 by event :Request load-depending connection to Big Consumer 1; select event number (normally afunction input) and via it, enter request; the event must be active steadily until the bigconsumer has been switched on. Should the signal remain on at the input, diesel stop willbe blocked. (Use for bow thrusters operation.)

0985. - requested load :Enter power of Consumer 1; if there is sufficient reserve power event [0984] will be setwithout a delay. If there isn’t sufficient power one or more diesel engines will be started. Ifafter switching on the additional diesel engines sufficient power becomes available event[0984] will be set after the load balancing delay time (set with parameter [0189]). Event[0984] should be put on an output relay. If the power is not available event [0986] will beactivated (for alarm).

BI G CONSUMER REQUEST ( BCR)↑

2376. REQUEST 8 by event : 02377. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2378. REQUEST 9 by event : 02379. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW

2380. REQUEST 10 by event : 02381. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2382. REQUEST 11 by event : 02383. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2384. REQUEST 12 by event : 02385. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2386. REQUEST 13 by event : 02387. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW2388. REQUEST 14 by event : 02389. - r equest ed l oad : 0 kW

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng range:

0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW0- 99990- 65000 kW



Service Manual


0986. - analog feedback :Load state of big consumer during operation; via an analogous input, the load state of thebig consumer (actual load referring to nominal load) can be sent to the load controller. Withthis additional information, the load controller can reserve the required load at the BUS. Ifthe reserved load of the big consumer is higher than the valid load within the BUS sectionone or more engines will be started, if available. This additional function of the load

controller works when the request event (event [0984]) is active.Use one of the four analogous inputs of the basic unit of the system (Analogue in 4-20 mA).

Example:If a 4-20 mA input is selected then an analogous signal of 4 mA means that no power of theconsumer is in use. 20 mA means the total power of the consumer parameter [0985] is inuse.The feedbacks can be activated with the related parameters [0986], [0990], [0994] or[0998]. The measure type of the selected analog input must be set to "%" or "Load [%]".The reserved power will be calculated from the actual analog input value if the request getsreleased.Example for request 1: the requested load (parameter [0985]) is 500 kW. The actual analog

input value is 10 %. So, the actual reserved power for this request is 450 kW.The system collects the feedbacks of all released requests. If another request gets active,the reserved power for all previously released requests are taken into account. This is doneby reducing the actual spinning reserve by the amount of all present reserved power for allreleased requests with analog feedbacks. The spinning reserve display on the PM pageshows this reduced value.The PM load depending starting (only the average load limits) and stopping (only the stopload limit) are also affected by active analog feedbacks. This functions uses a modifiedactual net load if there are active analog feedbacks in the net. This modified actual net loadwill be calculated by adding the present reserved power for all released requests to theactual net load. The modified actual net load is not shown on the display, or transferred viacommunication.Big consumer requests with analog feedbacks will not block the PM stop condition(parameter [0913])!The present reserved power will be shown on the PM page (same line as NET kW) if thereare active analog feedbacks in the net.



Service Manual


2.10.8 Blackout

The blackout module offers a powerful supervisory system, which is capable of managing allemergency situations in one net (see figure 2-46).

Figure 2-46 Blackout


0230. BUS1 - blackout by :Blackout 1 will be recognized if this event is active (e.g. function input).

0231. - mains moni tor :Blackout recognition via mains monitor; the mains monitor supervises the BUS1 voltagewhen this parameter is set to SINGLE or REDUNDANT. Redundancy means that alldevices in one net must recognize the BUS1 voltage limit.

0232. - vol tage limit :If parameter [0231] is enabled and one of the 3 lines of BUS1 voltage is lower than the limit

of parameter [0232] then the mains monitor condition is fulfilled and event [0232] will be set.

0233. - start delay :The delay will start if the blackout event condition [0230] or the mains monitor condition[0232] occurs. If the delay is passed blackout BUS1 start condition is fullfiled and event[0233] will be set.

BLACKOUT0230. BUS 1 – bl ackout by : 00231. – mai ns moni t or : REDUNDANT0232. – vol t age l i mi t : 40. 0 %0233. – st ar t del ay : 2. 0 sec0234. – st ar t di esel : NEXT0235. – st op enabl e by : 29570236. – st op del ay : 0 sec0237. BUS 2 – bl ackout by : 00238. – mai ns moni t or : ON0239. – vol t age l i mi t : 40. 0 %

0240. – st ar t del ay : 2. 0 sec0241. - st op enabl e by : 29570242. – st op del ay : 0 sec0243. STOP BUS 1, 2 bl ocked by: 5220244. STOP pr el i mi nary out put0245. START BUS 1 bl ocked by : 00246. START BUS 2 bl ocked by : 0

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:0- 9999 eventOFF/ SI NGLE/ REDUNDANT0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secALL/ NEXT/ OWN/ SEQUENCE0- 9999 event0- 9999 sec0- 9999 eventOFF/ ON0. 0- 999. 9 %

0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 event0- 9999 sec0- 9999 event

0- 9999 event0- 9999 event



Service Manual


0234. - start diesel :The starting mode can be set by this parameter. All devices in one net should have thisparameter set to the same value. There are several possibilities according to the mode:

• “ALL”: All stand-by diesels will start and close their CBs.

• “NEXT”: The first stand-by diesel will start.

• “OWN”: The own diesel (if in standby) will start.

• “SEQUENCE”: All stand-by diesels will start but only the generator with the highestpriority will close its CB. After that, the other generator will cancel thestartphase and remain running. If the first generator fails to close itsCB within 3 seconds, the generator with the next highest priority hasthe permission to close its CB.

NOTE: If more than one generator is started (by any source) and no CB is closed in thenet a special interlock function becomes active. This function assures that only onegenerator at the same time has the permission to close the CB. The permissiontime is limited to 3 seconds. The other generators will remain waiting with blocked

synchronic-events [1023],[1053] and[1083].

0235. - stop enable by :0236. - stop delay :

The stop delay gets activated if parameter [0235] is activated, the diesel is running andBlackout 1 is inactive. If the delay is passed and if Automatic has been selected and ifevent [0243] is inactive then the “own” diesel will be stopped.

0237. BUS2 - blackout by :Blackout 2 will be recognized if this event is active (e.g. function input).

0238. - mains moni tor :

Blackout recognition via mains monitor; the mains monitor supervises the BUS2 voltage ifparameter [0238] is switched to ON.

0239. - vol tage limit :If parameter [0231] is activated and one of the three lines of BUS2 voltage is lower than thelimit of parameter [0239] then the mains monitor condition will be fulfilled and event [0239]will be set.

0240. - start delay :The delay will start if the Blackout Event Condition [0237] or the Mains Monitor Condition[0239] occurs. If the delay is over event [0240] will be set and the device will start the “own”diesel (if in stand-by).

0241. - stop enable by :0242. - stop delay :

The stop delay gets activated if event [0241] is activated, the diesel is running and ifBlackout 2 is inactive. If the delay is over and Automatic and event [0243] is inactive, thedevice will stop the “own” diesel.

0243. STOP BUS1/2 blocked by :The stopping of Blackout 1 or 2 can be blocked with this event.

0244. STOP preliminary output . The event [0244] will be activated if the Delay [0236] or [0242] is passed and the stop isblocked by event [0243] or manual mode.

0245. START BUS1 blocked by :The starting of Blackout 1 can be blocked with this event.



Service Manual


0246. START BUS2 blocked by :The starting of Blackout 2 can be blocked with this event.

NOTE: For an automatic stop after blackout, it is advisable to use the event [2957] (blackout startsource) on parameters [0235] or [0241], because the event [2957] will be set on blackoutstart and will remain active until the engine is stopped by any source.



Service Manual


For details related to the blackout function, refer to the figure 2-47.

Figure 2-47 Blackout logic

BUS1

&

P [0231]:SINGLE/

P [0232]:

Limit reached

≥1

P [0230]: by event E

&P [0234]:

&

P [0234]:

AUTOM.

&

&

≥1

One node by P

One node with SINGLE limit

All nodes with REDUNDANT: Limit reached

P [0234]:

P [0234]: NEXT

Maste

CAN 1 - Bus

STARTOWN

Al l net1

STARTNEXT

STANDBY

START ALL

STANDBYS

BUS2

&

P [0238]: ON

P [0239]:

Limit reached

≥1

P [0237]: by

E [0240]

& AUTOM. STARTOWN

2

Stop 1/2

&P [0234]: OWN

≥1

P

&

AUTOM.

STOPOWN

P [0234]:

&No net nodewith Blackout 1

1

&

E [0235] (stop enable

Engine

P [0242]

&

AUTOM. 2

&Engine

E [0241] (stop enable

E [0243] (stop blocked

≥1

≥1

E [0244]

PreliminaryOutput event

E [0246] (start blocked

&E [0245] (start blocked



Service Manual


2.10.9 Engine control

The diesel control unit of the system controls and supervises the starting and stopping sequencesof the aggregate. The diesel control group contains the general parameter for speed adjustmentand prelubricating interval (see figure 2-48).

Figure 2-48 Engine contro l


0260. Engine control :Main switch for engine control; by setting this parameter to “ON”, the engine control function(starting and stopping of the aggregate) will be activated.

0261. SPEED - nominal :Nominal speed of the engine; the nominal speed of the engine should be given inrevolutions per minute (RPM).

0262. - ign ition :Ignition speed limit; the ignition speed limit will be used within the starting phase to switchoff the start valve when the speed signal exceeds this limit.

0263. - running up :Running-up speed limit; the running-up speed limit will be used within the starting phase torecognize that the engine is ready to take load.

0264. - overspeed :Overspeed limit; the overspeed limit can be used for the alarm system. This event numbershould be used to activate an alarm channel.

ENGI NE CONTROL

0260. Engi ne cont r ol : ON0261. SPEED – nomi nal : 1800 r pm0262. – i gni t i on : 15. 0 %0263. – r unni ng up : 85. 0 %0264. – overspeed : 150. 0 %0265. TACHO - i nput : OFF0266. PI CKUP - i nput : ON0267. – i mpul s / r ev. : 40268. LI MI TS – n max. di f f . : 10. 0 %

0269. – n hi gh l i mi t : 105. 0 %0270. – n l ow l i mi t : 95. 0 %0271. PRELUBRI CATE - pul set i me: 20 sec0272. - br eakt i me: 500 sec0273. Al ar mbl ocki ng del ay : 5. 0 sec0274. ENGI NE - speed pr eset : 0. 0 %0275. - act i vat e by : 0 ev.0276. MDEC di sabl e Cyl . Cut out : 0 ev.0277. I gni t i on by event : 0 ev.

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ON0- 99999 rpm0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %OFF/ CURR. 1- 4OFF/ ON/ I GNI TI ON/ BI N. I NP.0- 99990. 0- 999. 9 %

0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 99999 sec0- 99999 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 99990- 99990- 9999

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0265.TACHO - input : Analogous input for speed measurement; if a tacho generator gives the speed signal of theengine one of the four analogous inputs of the basic unit should be used. The adjustmentsetting of the analogous inputs is done within the parameter group “analog inputs” (seechapter 2.5).

0266. PICKUP - input :0267. - impuls /rev. :Pick-up input for speed measurement; if a pick-up system provides the speed signalparameter [0266] should be set to “ON”. The number of impulses the pick-up systemrecognizes during one revolution has to be set with parameter [0267].If parameter [0266] is set to “IGNITION” and at the pickup input is a high-signal the devicewill take the limit from parameter [0262] as the pickup speed value.The pickup input can be used as a common binary input (Event [0266]) if parameter [0266]is set to “BIN.INP”.

0268. LIMITS - n max. diff . :The speed signal can be measured via three speed channels: tacho generator, pick-up

system and via the generator voltage signal. Depending on which speed measuring systemis active, the speed signals of the respective channel are compared among themselves.When the measured speed signal differs more than this limit, event [0268] will be activated.Use this event number to activate a alarm.

The following two parameters are speed limit events. These events will be activated whenthe speed signal fulfills the corresponding conditions. They can be used for alarming.

0269. - n high limit :High speed limit; event [0269] will be activated if the speed signal is higher than this limit.

0270. - n low limit :

Low speed limit; event [0270] will be activated if the speed signal is lower than this limit.

0271. PRELUBRICATE - pulsetime :0272. - breaktime :

Prelubricating interval; for prelubricating the engine a pulse and a break time can bedefined. During the prelubricating pulse time, event [0271] is activated. This event has to beused to activate prelubrication via a function output. After the pulse time is passed, thebreak time will be started.Prelubrication works only in automatic mode. If the mode is started from manual toautomatic then prelubricating process will be introduced and started with the pulse time.The following events introduce the prelubrication process.



Service Manual


0273.Alarmblocking delay :For diesel engines it is necessary to block some alarm channels which are related to enginewarnings. The alarm blocking event [0273] will be activated immediately when the speedsignal falls below the ignition limit or if the running down phase event [0658] is active or thefixed delay event [0659] is active (see figure 2-49). If the speed signal reaches the ignitionlimit again event [0273] will be inactive after the setted delay is over.

Figure 2-49 Alarm block ing logic

0274. ENGINE - speed preset :

0275. - activate by :The speed will be set to parameter [0274] (in %) if the event set by parameter [0275] getsactive.If MDEC is active the speed (analog speed) will be sent to the MDEC unit for the fixed timeof 2 sec. After the 2 sec the speed demand will be reset to UP/DOWN. The preset isdisabled if parameter [0274] = 0.

0276. MDEC disable Cyl.Cutout :If the event is active the Cyl.Cutout 1+2 of the MDEC Controller are both disabled.

0277. Ignit ion by event :If the event is active the ignition speed is reached.Parameter [0266] must be set to “OFF” if this parameter [0277] is in use.

Running down time ≥1

P [0273]

E [0262]

E [0658] E [0273]

n > ignition

E [0659] Stopp fixed delay



Service Manual


2.10.10 Starting phase

The parameters of the starting phase contain the settings for control and supervision of the engineduring the starting phase (see figure 2-50).

Figure 2-50 Starting phase

The starting sequence includes a maximum of five phases (see also figure 2-50):

1. Preglowing timeThe first phase of the start procedure is used to preglow the engine. This phase can beshortened by an event.

2. Start time After preglowing the engine, the start time is activated. During this period the start valvewill be activated to run up the engine. This phase can be shortened by reaching theignition speed. After reaching the ignition speed, the start valve will be reset.

3. Running-up timeThe running-up time is a supervision time. If during this period the engine can not reachthe running-up speed and minimum voltage limit a fail event will be issued.

4. Ready-to-take-load time After reaching running-up conditions, the ready-to-take-load phase will be started.During this time the engine has to stabilize the speed before starting synchronization+ or in case of blackout, the engine has to take the load immediately.

5. Synchronizing periodDuring the synchronizing time, the speed and voltage controller try to synchronize thediesel generator to the BUS. In case both systems are synchronized, the circuit breakeron command will be issued.

ENGI NE STARTI NG PHASE0630. PREGLOWI NG - max t i me : 4. 0 sec0631. – shor t en by: 00632. START VALVE – max t r i al s: 30633. – f uel val ve: NO0634. – at RPM=0 : NO0635. – max t i me : 5. 0 sec0636. – BREAKTI ME : 10. 0 sec0637. RUNNI NG UP - max t i me *: 20. 0 sec0638. – mi n vol t . : 90. 0 %0639. READY TO TAKE LOAD t i me : 3. 0 sec

0640. SYNCHRONI ZI NG max t i me *: 120. 0 sec0641. St ar t next af t er 1 t r i al : NO0642. Cancel i f n > i gni t i on : NO0643. Cancel st ar t by event : 00644. St ar t count er : 00645. Al l st ar t t r i al s i n MANU: NO

Set t i ng r ange:0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 99990- 9999NO/ YESNO/ YES0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9%0. 0- 999. 9 sec

0. 0- 999. 9 secNO/ YES/ BLACKOUT/ NO STARTNO/ YES0- 99990- 65535NO/ YES

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



0630. PREGLOWING - max time :Preglowing of the engine; this time defines the preglowing period of the engine. The startingphase of the aggregate begins with the preglowing period. After this period the startingvalve will be set. If no preglowing time is required the time should be set to zero. If the

preglowing time is running event [0630] will be set by the system. This event is used toactivate a function output.

0631. - shorten by :The preglowing period (see parameter [0630]) can be interrupted by an event. If the event(defined with this parameter) is active the preglowing period will be interrupted and the startvalve will be activated.

0632. START VALVE - max tr ials :Number of start attempts; if the engine speed is below the ignition limit the start procedurewill be separated into three phases: 1. preglowing, 2. the start time (start valve) and if theengine has not reached the ignition speed, 3.the break time.

The number of starts to be attempted should be entered here. At the end of the lastunsuccessful start attempt, a start fault alarm will be displayed.

0633. - fuel valve :If a fuel oil valve is in use this parameter has to be set to “ON.” During start or operation ofthe diesel engine, the event [0660] is always active. This event becomes inactive within thestopping phase or if the engine is stopped (see figure 2-56).

Figure 2-51 Fuel oil valve logic

0634. - at RPM=0 :When the engine speed reaches 0 rpm the start valve can be set.

• “YES”: Start process is initialised here when the speed = 0. With this, break timemay be prolonged (for electro starters).

• “NO”: Start process is initialized at the end of break time even if the diesel engine

still operates below ignition speed.

0635. - max time :Maximum energizing time of start relay during start phase; use event [0635] to set thefunction output for the start relay.

0636. - BREAKTIME :Break time between start attempts during start phase

0637. RUNNING UP - max time * :0638. - min vol t. :

Running-up supervision time; the maximum supervising time allowed between rising aboveignition speed and reaching running-up speed should be entered here. The dieselgenerator is run up if the speed signal is above the running-up limit parameter [0263] andthe voltage of the generator is higher than the minimum voltage of parameter [0638].

&

E [0262]

E [0660]

n > ignition

Stopphase

≥1Startphase



Service Manual


0639. READY TO TAKE LOAD time : After the diesel generator reaches the run-up conditions (see parameters [0637] and[0638]) the ready-to-take-load delay will operate. This time delay is used to stabilize thespeed of the engine. After this delay time the next phase of the starting procedure will beintroduced (e.g. switch on the synchronizing unit).

0640. SYNCHRONIZING max time * :Synchronizing supervision time; if the diesel generator is ready to take load event [0640]will be activated. With this event one of the 3 synchronizing units can be activated. Tosupervise the synchronizing phase, a time limit can be entered. If after this time the circuitbreaker is not connected to the BUS a start failure will be issued.

0641. Start next after 1.trial :

• “NO”: After the last unsuccessful start attempt (see parameter [0632]), thenext available diesel engine of the same BUS section will be started.

• “YES”: After the first unsuccessful start attempt (see parameter [0632]), thenext available diesel engine of the same BUS section will be started.

• “BLACKOUT”: After the first unsuccessful start attempt the next generator will bestarted if Blackout 1 or 2 (event [0233] or [0240]) is active on thatdevice.

• “NO START”: no diesel engine will be started in any cases.

0642. Cancel if n > igni tion :With this parameter an additional condition for the start phase cancellation can be defined:

• “NO”: cancel the start phase if the CB is closed

• “YES”: cancel the start phase if the CB is closed and if the speed reaches theignition limit

0643. Cancel start by event :If this event is active any start will be cancelled or blocked.

0644. Start counter :Counts the start valves (event [0635]); this counter is also shown on the Diesel overviewpage.

0645. All start trials in MANU :Only one start trial will be executed (without start failure supervision) if this parameter is seton “NO” and a start command is given over the front key and the device is in “MANUAL”.Otherwise all trials are issued (with start failure supervision).



Service Manual


2.10.11 Stopping phase

The parameters of the stopping phase include the settings for control and supervision of theengine during the stopping phase (see figure 2-52).

Figure 2-52 Stopping phase

The stopping sequence includes at maximum four phases (see also figure 3-52):

1. Alarm stop delayThis phase will be used to start and connect another diesel aggregate to the BUSbefore the engine is stopped.

2. Off with load reductionWithin this phase, the load of the diesel generator is reduced with the speed lowersignal. If the load is under a certain limit the circuit breaker will be disconnected.

3. Running-down phaseThe running-down phase is a supervision period. During this period, the speed of theengine is reduced via the stop valve output. If the speed signal does not fall below theignition speed during that time an alarm event will be issued.

4. Stop delay fixed timeDuring the stop delay fixed time the event for the stop valve will be set. This event isused to ensure that the engine reaches zero speed.


0650. Stop abort if last gen. :Block stop order supervision; this parameter should be set to “YES,” if you want to block thestop order when the corresponding diesel generator is the last aggregate loading the BUS.Stop orders introduced by alarms with any priority and the immediate stop order from thekeyboard or by event [0661] will stop the engine regardless of this parameter.

ENGI NE STOPPI NG PHASE0650. St op abor t i f l ast gen. : NO0651. ALARM DELAY – max t i me : 120. 0 sec0652. LOAD REDUCT. – by event : 5110653. – l oadl i mi t : 5. 0 %0654. – max t i me : 20. 0 sec0655. – CB OFF0656. COOLI NG DOWN – t i me : 120. 0 sec0657. – i f al ar m : NO0658. RUNNI NG- DOWN – max t i me : 30. 0 sec0659. FI XED DELAY - t i me : 10. 0 sec

0660. St op val ve event0661. Emergency st op by event : 517 ev.0662. St op i nt er l ock by event : 519 ev.0663. Cancel st op by event : 0 ev.0664. No abort of st opphase : 0 ev.0665. LOAD RED. pul se/ pause by: 0 ev.0666. No cool i ng down phase : 0 ev.

Set t i ng r ange: YES/ NO0. 0- 999. 9 sec0- 99990. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secevent number0. 0- 999. 9 sec

YES/ NO0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 sec

event number0- 9999 event number0- 9999 event number0- 9999 event number0- 9999 event number0- 9999 event number0- 9999 event number

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


0651.ALARM DELAY - max time :Stop delay time; if an alarm (see chapter 1.3) with priority 2, 6, 8 or 9 introduces a stop ofthe engine the beginning of the stopping phase can be delayed with this delay time. Thisperiod of time is used to start and connect another diesel generator to the BUS. The alarmdelay maximum time can be shortened if another diesel generator is connected to the BUSbefore this time has passed.

0652. LOAD REDUCT. - by event :The load reduction phase will be introduced automatically within the stopping phase. Ifanother event activates the load reduction function (e.g. off-switch at the front door of thecubical) then the event number should be set here.Event [0652] is also the speed lower event and can be used on an binary output.

0653. - loadl imi t :Load limit for load reduction function; during the off with load reduction phase, the speedlower event will be set by the system until the load of the diesel generator is below this limit.Then the circuit breaker will be disconnected.

0654. - max time :Maximum time for load reduction phase; if the load reduction phase is not finished withinthis supervision time, a failure event will be issued.

0655. - CB OFF . Event for circuit breaker OFF command; this event number can be used to give out thecircuit breaker OFF command.

0656. COOLING DOWN - time :If the load reduction phase is finished the cooling down of the engine will be introduced. Aperiod of time in which the engine should cool down with nominal speed should be enteredhere.

0657. - if alarm :If an alarm with priority 2, 6 or 8 activates the stopping of the engine the user can decidewhether or not the cooling down period of the engine will also be activated.

0658. RUNNING-DOWN - max time :Running-down supervision time; a supervision period in which the speed of the engineshould fall below the ignition speed limit while the stop valve is active should be enteredhere.

0659. FIXED DELAY - time :Stop delay fixed time; if the speed signal is lower then the ignition speed limit the stop delay

fixed time starts. During this period the stop valve will be activated.

0660. Stop valve event . Event number for stop valve; this event number is used to activate a function output that isconnected to the stop valve (relay).

0661. Emergency stop by event :If the event (e.g. a function input) becomes active an emergency stop will be introduced.

0662. Stop interlock by event :If the event (e.g. a function input) is active all stop sources will be blocked (even alarmstops), with the exception of emergency stops by key or by event [0661].

0663. Cancel stop by event :If this event is active any stop (even emergency stops) will be cancelled or blocked.



Service Manual


0664. No abort of stopphase : An interruption of any stop phase (through any start source) is not possible if the event setunder parameter [0664] is active. Furthermore all starts are blocked.

0665. LOAD RED. pulse/pause by :The pulse/pause function for the load reduction phase can be enabled with this event

switch. The pulse/pause times will be taken from the Load sharing parameters [2494] and[2495] (must be greater zero!). The function works in all Load reduction modes (within thestop phase, or “by event”). Event [0652] (n<) will be filtered by the event history.

0666. No cooling down phase :If active, no cooling down phase will be introduced.



Service Manual


Figure 2-53 Starting procedure of the diesel generator

A L A R M B L O C K I N G

O P E R A T O I N /

S Y N C H R O N I . W O R K I N G

P R E G L O W T

I M E

[ 6 3 0 ]

R U N N I N G U P

S U P E R V I S E D T I M E ( 2 )

[ 6 3 7 ]

S T A R T T I M E ( 1 )

[ 6 3 5 ]

W A I T I N G F O R T A K E

L O A D T I M E

[ 6 5 9 ]

S Y N C H R O N I S I N G S U P E R V I S E D T I M E ( 2 )

[ 6 4 0 ]


R E L E A S E

R A T E D

S P E E D / V O L T A G E

I M M E D I A T E

S T A R T

S T A R T

S P E E D / %

O V E R S P E E D [ 2 6 4 ]

N O M I N A L R A T E D S P E E D 1 0 0 % [ 2 6 1 ]

R U N N I N G U P S P E E D [ 2 6 3 ]

I G N I T I O N S P E E D [ 2 6 2 ]

E V E N T S ( O U T P U T S ) :

( T I M E )

[ 6 3 5 ]

E M E R G E N C Y S T O P

S T O P V A L V E

B O O S T E R V A L V E S

P R E G L O W

F U E L V A L V E

S T A R T V A L V E

B R E A K E R O N N E X T D I E S E L

B R E A K E R O F F

P R E L U B R I C A T I O N

F E E D B A C K B R E A K E R O N

n < ( S P E E D L O W E R )

[ 6 3 5 ]

6 3 0

[ 6 3 5 ]

[ 6 6 0 ]

[ 6 6 1 ]

[ x x x ]

[ 6 5 5 ]

2 7 1

[ 1 1 3 ]

6 5 2

[ 2 7 3 ]

D I S P L A Y I N D I C A T I O N

S T A R T V A L V E

( B R E A K T I M E )

P R E G L O W I N G

R E A D Y T O T A K E L O A D

R U N N I N G U P

A L L N O T E S I N B R A C K E T S A R E R E

F E R I N G T O T H E P A R A M E T E R R E C O R D O F S Y M A P

2 ) E V

E N T I S A C T I V E A S L O N G A C T I V E A S T H E B R E A K E R

I S C L O S E D

1 ) A .

C . B . O F F W I T H L O A D R E D U C T I O N I S A S L O N G A C T

I V E A S T H E B R E A K E R I S S W I T C H E D O F F

D I E S E L

O P E R A T I O N

B R E A K E R

O N

T I M E F O R R E L E A S E A L A R M B L O C K I N G

[ 2 7 3 ]

~~

3 )

3 ) G E

N E R A T O R V O L T A G E



Service Manual


Figure 2-54 Stopping procedure of the diesel generator

A L . 2 S T O P D E L A Y T I M E

[ 6 5 1 ]

O F F W I T H L O A D

R E D U C T I O N

[ 6 5 5 ]

C O O L I N G D O W N T I M E

[ 6 5 6 ]

R U N

N I N G D O W N S U P E R V I S E T I M E ( 2 )

[ 6 5 8 ]

S T O P D E L A Y F I X E D T I M E

[ 6 5 9 ]

I M M E D I A T E

S T O P

B R E A K E R

O F F

D E L A Y

E D

S T O P

D E L A Y E D

A L A R M S T O P

S P E E D / %

O V

E R S P E E D [ 2 6 4 ]

N O M I N A L R A T E D S P E

E D 1 0 0 % [ 2 6 1 ]

R U N N I N G U P S P E E D [ 2 6 3 ]

I G N I T I O N S P E E D [ 2 6 2 ]

E V E N T S ( O U T P U T S

) :

t ( T I M E )

[ 6 3 5 ]

S T O P

F I X E D

E M E R G E N C Y S T O P

S T O P V A L V E

B O O S T E R V A L V E S

P R E G L O W

F U E L V A L V E S

S T A R T V A L V E

B R E A K E R O N N E X T D I E S E L

B R E A K E R O F F

P R E L U B R I C A T I O N

F E E D B A C K B R E A K E R O N

n < ( S P E E D L O W E R )


[ 6 3 5 + 6 3 7 ]

[ 6 3 0 ]

[ 6 3 5 ]

[ 6 6 0 ]

[ 6 6 1 ]

[ x x x ]

[ 6 5 5 ]

[ 2 7 1 ]

[ 1 1 3 ]

[ 6 5 2 ]

[ 2 7 3 ]

1 )

2 )

2 )

D I S P L A Y

I N D I C A T I O N

L O A D

1 )

R E D U C T I O N

A L A R M 2 D L E A Y

R U N N I N G D O W N

C O O L I N G D O W N

A L L N O T E S

I N B R A C K E T S A R E R E F E R I N G T O T H E P A R A M E T E R R E C O R D O F S Y M A P ®

2 ) E V E N T I S A C T I V E A S L O N G A C T I V E A S T

H E B R E A K E R I S C L O S E D

1 ) A . C . B . O F F W I T H L O A D R E D U C T I O N I S A S L O N G A C T I V E A S T H E B R E A K E R I S S W I T C H E D O F F



Service Manual


2.10.12 Preferential trip limi ts/Abnormal BUS condit ion

With the parameter group “preferential trip limits,” the conditions for non-essential consumer tripand abnormal BUS situation can be defined (see figure 2-55).

Figure 2-55 Preferential trip limits


Preferential trip settings [0670] to [0681]:

0670. HIGH CURRENT - 1. limi t :Setting of the first current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measuredcurrent reaches this limit event [0670] will be activated.

0671. - delay :If event [0670] is active and this delay time is passed event [0671] will be activated andremains active as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0670](including 1% hysteresis). This parameter should be used for the alarm controller.

0672. - 2. limit :Setting of the second current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measuredcurrent reaches this limit event [0672] will be activated.


0674. - 3. limit :Setting of the third current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measuredcurrent reaches this limit event [0674] will be activated.

PREFERENTI AL TRI P LI MI TS0670. HI GH CURRENT – 1. l i mi t : 70. 0 %0671. – del ay: 30. 0 sec0672. – 2. l i mi t : 75. 0 %0673. – del ay: 15. 0 sec0674. – 3. l i mi t : 80. 0 %0675. – del ay: 5. 0 sec0676. – 4. l i mi t : 0. 0 %0677. – del ay: 0. 0 sec0678. LOW FREQUENCY – l i mi t : 0. 0 %0679. – del ay: 0. 0 sec

0680. HI GH LOAD – l i mi t : 0. 0 %0681. – del ay: 0. 0 sec0682. BUS1 ABNORM. - over f r eq. : 51. 50 Hz0683. - under f r eq: 48. 50 Hz0684. – over vol t . : 105. 0 %0685. – under vol t : 95. 0 %0686. - del ay: 10. 0 sec0687. PREF. TRI P –check l i mi t s: NET

Set t i ng r ange:0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)

0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 00- 99. 99 Hz0. 00- 99. 99 Hz0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)OWN/ NET

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



0676. - 4. limit :

Setting of the fourth current limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measuredcurrent reaches this limit event [0676] will be activated.


0678. LOW FREQUENCY - limi t :Setting of the low frequency limit event for preferential trip purpose; this limit will only bechecked if the CB is closed. If the actual measured frequency falls below this limit event[0678] will be activated.

0679. - delay :If event [0678] is active and this delay time is passed event [0679] will be activated andremains active as long as the actual value exceeds the limit of parameter [0678] (including0.1% hysteresis). This parameter should be used for the alarm controller.

0680. HIGH LOAD - limit :Setting of the high load limit event for preferential trip purpose; if the actual measuredpower reaches this limit event [0680] will be activated.

0681. - delay :If event [0680] is active and this delay time is passed event [0681] will be activated andremains active as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0680]

(including 1% hysteresis). This parameter should be used for the alarm controller.

0687. PREF.TRIP - check limits :This parameter is related to the limits [0670] to [0681], not to the abnormal BUS limits.

• “OWN”: check only the own device

• “NET”: check all devices in the same net

Abnormal BUS1 settings [0682] to [0686]:

0682. BUS1 ABNORM. - overfreq. :

Setting of the overfrequency limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual measuredBUS1 frequency reaches this limit event [0682] will be activated.

0683. - underfreq :Setting of the underfrequency limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actualmeasured BUS1 frequency falls below this limit event [0683] will be set.

0684. - overvo lt . :Setting of the overvoltage limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual measuredBUS1 voltage reaches this limit event [0684] will be activated.

0685. - undervol t :

Setting of the under voltage limit event for abnormal BUS1 purpose; if the actual measuredBUS1 voltage falls below this limit event [0685] will be activated.



Service Manual


0686. - delay :If one of the above conditions (events [0682] to [0685]) is active and this delay time ispassed then event [0686] will be activated. Use this event number for abnormal BUS alarm.



Service Manual


2.10.13 Addi tional l imits

With these additional limits the user can define further events for his application (see figure 2-56).The time delays of these limits are not as exact as the delay time of the ANSI devices.

Figure 2-56 Addit ional limits


0280. OVERSPEED - limit :Setting of an additional overspeed limit; if the actual measured speed signal exceeds thislimit event [0280] will be activated.

0281. - delay :If event [0280] is active and this delay time is passed event [0281] will be activated andremain active as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0280] (including

1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0282. OVERVOLTAGE - limit :Setting of an additional overvoltage limit; if the actual measured voltage exceeds this limit,event [0282] will be activated.

0283. - delay :If event [0282] is active and this delay time is passed event [0283] will be activated andremain active as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [0282] (including1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0284. OVERCURRENT - limit :

Setting of an additional over current limit; if the actual measured current exceeds this limitevent [0284] will be activated.

ADDI TI ONAL LI MI TS0280. OVERSPEED – l i mi t : 105. 0 %0281. – del ay: 0. 5 sec0282. OVERVOLTAGE – l i mi t : 115. 0 %0283. – del ay: 2. 5 sec0284. OVERCURRENT – l i mi t : 90. 0 %0285. – del ay: 2. 5 sec0286. OVERLOAD ( OWN) – l i mi t : 95. 0 %0287. – del ay: 0. 5 sec0288. OVERLOAD ( NET) – l i mi t : 85. 0 %0289. – del ay: 0. 5 sec

0290. PF CAP. LOW – l i mi t : 0. 750291. – del ay: 4. 0 sec0292. PF I ND. LOW – l i mi t : 0. 750293. – del ay: 4. 0 sec0294. REVERSE POWER – l i mi t : 10. 0 %0295. – del ay: 0. 5 sec0296. REACT. POWER I ND. – l i mi t : 40. 0 %0297. – del ay: 0. 5 sec0298. NETLOAD excl . OWN- l i mi t : 10. 0 %0299. – del ay: 0. 5 sec

Set t i ng r ange:0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)

0. 00- 1. 000. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 00- 1. 000. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 5…999. 9 sec ( 0. 5 sec st eps)

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



0286. OVERLOAD (OWN) - limit :

Setting of an additional overload limit; if the actual measured load of the feeder exceedsthis limit event [0286] will be activated.


0288. OVERLOAD (NET) - limit :Setting of an additional overload limit; if the actual measured load of the BUS section (net)exceeds this limit event [0288] will be activated.


0290. PF CAP. LOW - limit :Setting of a capacitive power factor limit; if the actual measured capacitive power factor fallsbelow this limit event [0290] will be activated.

0291. - delay :If event [0290] is active and this delay time is passed event [0291] will be activated andremain active as long as the actual value exceeds the limit of parameter [0290] (including

1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0292. PF IND. LOW - limit :Setting of a inductive power factor limit; if the actual measured inductive power factor fallsbelow this limit event [0292] will be activated.

0293. - delay :If event [0292] is active and this delay time is passed event [0293] will be activated andremain active as long as the actual value exceeds the limit of parameter [0292] (including1% hysteresis). This event number should be used for control functions.

0294. REVERSE POWER - limit :

Setting of an additional reverse power limit; if the actual measured reverse power exceedsthis limit event [0294] will be activated.


0296. REACT.POWER IND. - limit :Setting of a reactive inductive power limit; if the actual measured reactive power (inductivearea only) exceeds this limit event [0296] will be activated.




Service Manual


0298. NETLOAD excl .OWN - limit :Setting of a special overload limit; if the actual measured load of the BUS section (net),without the own load, exceeds this limit, event [0298] will be activated. This event can beused to cancel a stopping phase if the future net load becomes to high, during loadreduction. For this purpose set event [0298] on parameter [0187] (remote start) and thedevice will make a restart of the engine.

0299. - delay :If event [0298] is active and this delay time is passed event [0299] will be activated.



Service Manual


3 Relay settings

Figures 3-1 to 3-3 show the ANSI device list, a list of the relay protection functions of whichSYMAP® is capable.

Figure 3-1 ANSI-DEVICE LIST-1


ANSI - DEVI CE LI ST↑

50 I nst ant aneous over cur r ent50G/ N I nst ant . gr ound over cur r ent51 AC t i me overcur r ent51G/ N AC t i me ground over cur r ent51LR Locked r otor ( motor)59 Over vol t age r el ay59 B Bus overvol t age r el ay64/ 59N Over vol t age gr ound r el ay66 St ar t i nhi bi t ( mot or )67 AC di r ect i onal over cur r ent67GS/ GD AC di r ect i onal gr ound r el ay78 Vect or surge super vi si on ↓

ALARMS EXI TSYSTEM

ANSI - DEVI CE LI ST

15 Mat chi ng devi ce ( mot or pot i ) 24 Over exci t at i on r el ay25 / A Synchr oni zi ng r el ay27 Undervol t age r el ay27 B Bus undervol t age r el ay32 Over l oad r el ay37 Under cur r ent r el ay ( mot or )40 Q Loss of exci t at i on r el ay46 Reverse phase r el ay47 Phase sequence vol t age r el ay

49 Thermal over l oad50BF Br eaker f ai l ur e ↓

ALARMS EXI TSYSTEM



Service Manual



ANSI - DEVI CE LI ST↑

78 S Out of st ep t r i ppi ng79 AC r ecl osi ng r el ay81 Fr equency r el ay81 B Bus f r equency r el ay

86 Lockout r el ay87 Di f f er ent i al pr ot ecti on87N Rest r i ct ear t h f aul t r el ay94 Super vi si on r el ay95i I nr ush bl ocki ng r el ay

FF Fuse f ai l ur e ( vol t ages)AL Auxi l i ar y l i mi t sCW Cont act wear measur ement

ALARMS EXI TSYSTEM



Service Manual


3.1 ANSI 15 – Matching device (motorpoty)

With this functions it is possible to convert the speed and voltage binary event signals (UP/DOWN)from any sources to analog values, and proceed them to analog outputs or to the PWM output, inorder to perform an analog regulation.The sources of binary event signals are all three-point-regulators (Load sharing, Frequencycontroller, Voltage regulation...), and any other sources, like communication, manual, binary inputs.

NOTE: This function is only operating with SYMAP XG/BCG!

Figure 3-4 ANSI 15-1


ANSI 15 Matchi ng devi ce ( motorpot i )

1025. SPEED devi ce enabl e : ANALOG1026. – conver t pul se: 1 sec= 1. 0 mA1027. – out put pr eset : 90. 0 %1028. – act i vat e pr eset by: 5241097. - PWM f r equency : 500 Hz1098. - PWM ampl i t ude max : 100. 0 %1099. - PWM ampl i t ude mi n : 0. 0 %1055. VOLTAGE devi ce enabl e : OFF 1056. – conver t pul se: 1 sec= 1. 5 mA1057. – out put pr eset : 95. 0 % ↓

Set t i ng r ange:

* 0. 0- 999. 9 mA ( % f or PWM)0. 0- 999. 9 %0- 99995- 5000 Hz0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %OFF/ ON/ I NVERT0. 0- 999. 9 mA 0. 0- 999. 9 %* OFF/ ANALOG/ ANA. I NVERT/ PWM PWM I NVERT CAN BUS

BACK EXI T

ANSI 15 Matchi ng devi ce ( motorpot i )↑

1058. – act i vat e pr eset by: 5261280. SPEED - Regul at i on : OFF1281. - match. devi ce max: 120. 0 %1282. - mat ch. devi ce mi n: 80. 0 %1283. - Dr oop : 4. 0 %1284. - PI D r egul at or : OFF1285. - PI D r egul at or Kp: 0. 801286. - PI D r egul ator Tn: 2000 ms1287. - PI D r egul ator Tv: 30 ms1288. - out put f ul l scal e: 75. 0 % ↓

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999OFF/ ON0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %OFF/ ON0. 0- 655. 340. 0- 65535 ms0. 0- 65535 ms0. 0- 999. 9 % BACK EXI T



Service Manual




1025. SPEED device enable :Fixed switch to enable the device for different hardware outputs:

• “OFF”: the function is disabled.

• “ANALOG”: the function is routed to the analog outputs.

• “ANA.INVERT”: the function is routed to the analog outputs and the output is inverted.

• “PWM”: the function is routed to the PWM output.

• “PWM INVERT”: the function is routed to the PWM output and the output is inverted.

• „CAN BUS“: the function is routed to the CANBUS.

NOTE: For “ANALOG” and “ANA.INVERT” the related analog output must be set to“Speed ctrl” (see chapter 2.7). For “PWM” and “PWM INVERT” a special hardwareedition is required. Contact the manufacturer for this function.

1026. - convert pulse :Converts a pulse of 1 sec to mA (or to % if PWM is used) according to this parameter; thepulses for the speed device comes from several functions. These functions are: the sync.units, load sharing, freq. controller, load reduction, binary inputs, communication, and theload page (manual speed control).

1027. - output preset :1028. - activate preset by :

As long as the event (parameter [1028]) is active, the analog output (or PWM) will be set toparameter [1027].

NOTE: Also on Power-ON this preset will be executed so parameter [1027] should be setto a significant value (if the speed device is to be used).

1097. - PWM frequency :If PWM is used, the static PWM frequency have to be set with this parameter.

1098. - PWM amplitude max :

1099. - PWM amplitude min :If PWM is used, the static max/min values for the PWM voltage signal amplitude have to beset with this parameters. The max. value is 100.0 % = 10 V.

ANSI 15 Matchi ng devi ce ( motorpot i )↑

1289. - out put zer oscal e: 25. 0 %1290. VOLT. - Regul at i on : OFF1291. - match. devi ce max: 120. 0 %1292. - mat ch. devi ce mi n: 80. 0 %

1293. - Dr oop : 4. 0 %1294. - PI D r egul at or : OFF1295. - PI D r egul at or Kp: 0. 801296. - PI D r egul ator Tn: 2000 ms1297. - PI D r egul ator Tv: 30 ms1298. - out put f ul l scal e: 75. 0 %1299. - out put zer oscal e: 25. 0 %

Set t i ng r ange:

0. 0- 999. 9 %OFF/ ON0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %

0. 0- 999. 9 %OFF/ ON0. 01- 99. 990- 65000 ms0- 65000 ms0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1055. VOLTAGE device enable :Fixed switch to enable the device; to use the voltage device also an analog output must beset to “Volt. ctrl” (see chapter 2.7).With “INVERT” it is possible to invert the output behavior of the device.

1056. - convert pulse :

Converts a pulse of 1 sec to mA according to this parameter; the pulses for the voltagedevice comes from several functions. These functions are: the sync. units, voltagecontroller, power factor controller, binary inputs, communication, and the load page (manualvoltage control).

1057. - output preset :1058. - activate preset by :

See parameters [1027] and [1028].

With the following parameters an additional real time speed and voltage regulation can beactivated. Only the parameters for the speed regulation [1280] to [1289] are explained here,because these parameters are the same as for the voltage regulation [1290] to [1299].

1280. SPEED - Regulation :Fixed switch to enable the additional real time speed regulation. The parameters [1281] to[1289] have absolutely no effect if this parameter [1280] is set to OFF.

1281. - match.device max :1282. - match.device min :

With these parameters the analog value of the speed matching device must be adapted tothe feedback value. The analog value can be seen as the output of an integrator. Thefeedback value is the actual measured speed (rpm or Hz).

Example: If the generator can operate only in the range of 40-60 Hz, and the nominal

frequency is 50 Hz, than set this parameters to 80-120 %.NOTE: If parameter [1280] is set to OFF, the min-max limitations are internally set to

0-100 %.

1283. - Droop :With this parameter a droop influence can be set. The droop is reducing the setpoint if themeasured power is rising. If the power is 100 % or above, the set point will be reduced bymax. the amount of parameter [1283]. If the power is 0%, the set point is not influenced atall. For the speed regulation the active power is taken into account and for the voltageregulation the reactive power. This parameter can be set to 0 %, if no droop influence isneeded.

1284. - PID regulator :Fixed switch to enable or bypass the additional real time speed regulation with a PIDregulator. The parameters [1285] to [1287] have absolutely no effect if this parameter[1284] is set to OFF. The output of the PID regulator is limited by the min-max values of theparameters [1281] and [1282]. The preset function of the parameters [1027] and [1028] isalso working on the PID regulator.

1285. - PID regulator Kp :The Kp value represents the gain of the PID regulator. The gain influences the integration(I) and the differentiation (D) of the PID regulator. Higher values results in a more dynamicperformance of the regulator.

1286. - PID regulator Tn :The Tn value represents the integration time of the PID regulator. Smaller values results ina more dynamic performance of the regulator.



Service Manual


1287. - PID regulator Tv :The Tv value represents the differentiation time of the PID regulator. Higher values resultsin a more dynamic performance of the regulator.

1288. - output fullscale :1289. - output zeroscale :

With these parameters the regulator value must be adapted to the hardware output (analogoutput or PWM). The regulator value is the output of the PID regulator, or (if bypassed withparameter [1284]), the output of the matching device.

Example: If the analog output should operate only in the range of 5- 15 mA (45-55 Hz),then set this parameters to 25-75 % (5 mA = 25 % and 15 mA=75 %).

Refer to the Figures 3-7 and 3-8 for a schematic overview on the speed and voltage regulation.



Service Manual


Figure 3-7 ANSI 15 – Speed regulation



Service Manual


Figure 3-8 ANSI 15 – Vo ltage regulat ion



Service Manual


3.2 ANSI 24 – Overexci tation Relay

Figure 3-9 ANSI 24


1090. Overexcitation relay :If the over excitation relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1091. - U/F Limit value :Limit setting of over excitation relay; if the relation between voltage and frequency exceedsthis limit event [1091] will be activated.

Example: If the voltage of the generator is 100 % of the nominal rated voltage and thegenerator frequency is 98 % of nominal rated frequency then the difference is 2 %, whichwill be compared with this parameter. If the actual measured difference exceeds the limitvalue of parameter [1091] then event [1091] will be activated.

1092. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1901]; if event [1091] is active and this delay time is passed thenevent [1092] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter[1091]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1093. - min. vol tage :Minimum voltage for relay operation; to secure a reliable relay function, the voltage limit of

this parameter must exceed the limit to enable the protection function.

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF

0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %

ANSI 24 Over exci t at i on r el ay

1090. Over exci t at i on r el ay : ON

1091. - U/ F Li mi t val ue : 25. 0 %1092. - del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec1093. – mi n. vol t age : 70. 0 %

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.3 ANSI 25 /A – Automat ic Synchronizing

Automatic synchronizing operates when two AC circuits are within the desired limits of frequency,phase angle and voltage range, allowing these two circuits to parallel one another.There are three automatic synchronizing units. Number 1 is responsible for the synchronization ofthe feeder BUS to BUS1; Number 2, of the feeder BUS to BUS2, and Number 3, between BUS1and BUS2.The synchronizing units are laid out redundant. Two processor systems are responsible for thecontrol and the supervision of the main breaker-on contact of the synchronizing unit.

NOTE: About the calibration parameters [0042] to [0044] you can put the respectivesynchronizing units 1 to 3 properly. On this occasion, the phase corner is calibrated toneutralise the phase displacement. However, the calibration can occur only about theparametertool (see Parametertool, chapter 2.4.4).

If SYMAP® is used for ANSI 25 check synchronizing only the following parameters are required forsetup:

• Sync. Unit No. 1: [1000] to [1007] and [1023]



SYMAP® parameters for Synchronizing Unit 1 (feeder to BUS1) (figures 3-10 and 3-11):

Figure 3-10 ANSI 25/A-1

ANSI 25 / A Synchr oni zi ng r el ay

1000. Sync. uni t 1 act i ve by : 01001. - MAX phase angl e : 8 deg

1002. - MAX f r equency di f f . : 150 mHz1003. - MI N f r equency : 99. 0 %1004. - MAX f r equency : 101. 0 %1005. - MAX vol t age di f f . : 5. 0 %1006. - MI N vol t age : 95. 0 %1007. - MAX vol t age : 105. 0 %1008. - f r eq. set . pul se t i me : 100. 0 sec1009. - f r eq. set . br eak t i me : 2. 0 sec1010. – speed push af t er 10s : 500 ms1011. – vol t . set . pul se t i me : 180. 0 sec

↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

Event no.0- 30 deg

0- 2000 mHz70. 0- 100. 0 %100. 0- 130. 0 %0. 1- 30. 0 %70. 0- 100. 0 %100. 0- 130. 0 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 ms0. 1- 999. 9 sec



Service Manual



SYMAP® parameters for Synchronizing Unit 2 (feeder to BUS2) (figures 3-12 and 3-13):


ANSI 25 / A Synchr oni zi ng r el ay↑

1030. Sync. uni t 2 act i ve by : 01031. - MAX phase angl e : 8 deg1032. - MAX f r equency di f f . : 200 mHz1033. - MI N f r equency : 99. 0 %1034. - MAX f r equency : 101. 0 %

1035. - MAX vol t age di f f . : 5. 0 %1036. - MI N vol t age : 95. 0 %1037. - MAX vol t age : 105. 0 %1038. - f r eq. set . pul se t i me : 100. 0 sec1039. - f r eq. set . br eak t i me : 2. 0 sec1040. – speed push af t er 10s : 500 ms1041. – vol t . set . pul se t i me : 10. 0 sec

↓ BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

Event no.0- 30 deg0- 2000 mHz70. 0- 100. 0 %100. 0- 130. 0 %

0. 1- 30. 0 %70. 0- 100. 0 %100. 0- 130. 0 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 ms0. 1- 999. 9 sec


1012. – vol t . set . br eak t i me : 0. 5 sec1013. – f r eq. hi gher event1014. – f r eq. l ower event1015. – vol t . hi gher event

1016. – vol t . l ower event1017. – phase r egu. act i ve at : 120 mHz1018. – phase 360 deg pul se : 1. 00 sec1019. – cl osi ng di r ect i on : DOWN1020. – CB cl osi ng del ay : 50 ms1021. – l i ve/ dead cond. check: ON1022. – mi n vol t age l evel : 10. 0 %1023. – CB sync. ON event1024. – abnor mal bus 1 event ↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

0. 1- 999. 9 secevent r emi nder f or out putevent r emi nder f or out putevent r emi nder f or out put

event r emi nder f or out put0- 9999 mHz*0. 01- 655. 34 secUP/ DOWN/ BOTH0- 1000 msON/ OFF0. 0- 99. 9 %event r emi nder f or out putevent r emi nder f or out put* must be smal l er t han

par amet er [ 1002]



Service Manual



SYMAP® parameters for Synchronizing Unit 3 (BUS1 to BUS 2) (figures 3-14 and 3-15):



1060. Sync. uni t 3 act i ve by : 01061. - MAX phase angl e : 8 deg1062. - MAX f r equency di f f . : 200 mHz1063. - MI N f r equency : 99. 0 %1064. - MAX f r equency : 101. 0 %

1065. - MAX vol t age di f f . : 5. 0 %1066. - MI N vol t age : 95. 0 %1067. - MAX vol t age : 105. 0 %1068. - f r eq. set . pul se t i me : 100. 0 sec1069. - f r eq. set . br eak t i me : 2. 0 sec1070. – speed push af t er 10s : 500 ms1071. – vol t . set . pul se t i me : 10. 0 sec

↓ BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

Event no.0- 30 deg0- 2000 mHz70. 0- 100. 0 %100. 0- 130. 0 %

0. 1- 30. 0 %70. 0- 100. 0 %100. 0- 130. 0 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0- 9999 ms0. 1- 999. 9 sec


1042. – vol t . set . br eak t i me : 2. 0 sec1043. – f r eq. hi gher event1044. – f r eq. l ower event1045. – vol t . hi gher event

1046. – vol t . l ower event1047. – phase r egu. act i ve at : 30 mHz1048. – phase 360 deg pul se : 0. 10 sec1049. - cl osi ng di r ect i on : DOWN1050. – CB cl osi ng del ay : 50 ms1051. – l i ve/ dead cond. check: ON1052. – mi n vol t age l evel : 10. 0 %1053. – CB sync. ON event1054. – abnor mal bus 2 event ↓

Set t i ng r ange:


event r emi nder f or out put0- 9999 mHz0. 01- 655. 34 secUP/ DOWN/ BOTH0- 1000 msON/ OFF0. 0- 99. 9 %event r emi nder f or out putevent r emi nder f or out put

BACK EXI T



Service Manual




The following parameter descriptions correspond to Synchronizing Unit 1 (feeder to BUS1).Synchronizing Units 2 and 3 have the same parameters and differ only in their parameter andevent numbers (see also description of synchronizing page within the user’s manual).

1000. Sync. Unit 1 active by :To activate the Synchronizing Unit No.1, an event number (e.g. binary input event) must beset. If this event number is active the synchronizing window appears and the synchronizerwith its frequency and voltage controller is operative. If the Synchronizing Unit is active thenthe Synchronizing Site is indicated (see also chapter 2.4.4.8 in User’s Manual).

1001. - MAX phase angle :The maximum phase angle (positive and negative angle) appears in the window in whichthe closing order for the switching device (breaker) is given.

1002. - MAX frequency dif f. :If the difference of frequency is higher than the set point then the synchron closing isblocked until the difference of frequency drops below the set point.

1003. - MIN frequency :Minimum frequency limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the frequency of BUS1 is below theminimum frequency limit then the frequency controller will be deactivated. That means theoutput to send speed lower signals will be blocked.

1004. - MAX frequency :Maximum frequency limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the frequency of BUS1 is above themaximum frequency limit then the frequency controller will be deactivated. That means theoutput to send speed higher signals will be blocked.

1005. - MAX vol tage dif f. :If the difference in voltages is higher than the set point the synchron closing will be blockeduntil the difference in voltages drops below the set point.


1072. – vol t . set . br eak t i me : 2. 0 sec1073. – f r eq. hi gher event :1074. – f r eq. l ower event :1075. – vol t . hi gher event :

1076. – vol t . l ower event :1077. – phase r egu. act i ve at : 30 mHz1078. – phase 360 deg pul se : 0. 10 sec1079. - cl osi ng di r ect i on : DOWN1080. – CB cl osi ng del ay : 50 ms1081. – l i ve/ dead cond. check: ON1082. – mi n vol t age l evel : 10. 0 %1083. – CB sync. ON event1084. – abnor mal bus 2 event

Set t i ng r ange:


event r emi nder f or out put0 9999 mHz0. 01- 655. 34 secUP/ DOWN/ BOTH0- 1000 msON/ OFF0. 0- 99. 9 %event r emi nder f or out putevent r emi nder f or out put

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1006. - MIN voltage :Minimum voltage limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the voltage of BUS1 is below theminimum voltage limit then the voltage controller will be deactivated. That means the outputto send voltage lower signals will be blocked.

1007. - MAX vol tage :

Maximum voltage limit for “abnormal BUS” check; if the voltage of BUS1 is above themaximum voltage limit then the voltage controller will be deactivated. That means theoutput to send voltage higher signals will be blocked.

1008. - freq.set.pulse time :The pulse characteristic for frequency adjustment during synchronization is set here. Thistime defines the pulse time which corresponds to 100% frequency difference. The calc.pulse is modified by the difference between the two frequency inputs in the following way:

Calc. pulse (sec) = Parameter [1008] / 100 × ΔF (%)

with:Parameter [1008] : defined pulse time at 100% frequency difference,ΔF (%): frequency difference between FEEDER and BUS1 in percent of nominal

Example: Typical Setting: 100 secParameter [1008] = 100 sec means:If the frequency difference between FEEDER and BUS1 is 100% a calc. pulseof 100 seconds will be set.If the frequency difference is 0.5 Hz (1% at 50 Hz nominal-rated frequency)then a calc. pulse of 1 sec will be set.If the frequency difference is positive (FFEEDER > FBUS1) the n < event [1014] willbe activated for the calc. pulse time.If the frequency difference is negative (FFEEDER < FBUS1) the n > event [1013] willbe activated for the calc. pulse time.

1009. - freq.set.break time :Typical setting: 2 secThe cycle time for the calculation of the pulse times for speed adjustment duringsynchronization is set here. At the beginning of the break time, the frequency controller willcalculate and set the next pulse (see parameter [1008]).

1010. - speed push after 10 s :If the difference between the electrical angles of the generator and BUS does not becomezero within 10 seconds then an impulse of the set time in this parameter will be given.

NOTE: Instead of the speed push, the phase regulator can be used.

1011. - vol t.set.pulse time :The pulse time for voltage adjustment during synchronization is set here. Pulse time ismodified by the difference between the voltages inputs.

1012. - vol t.set.break time :The break time between pulse times for voltage adjustment during synchronization is sethere.

1013. - freq. higher event .Use this event to activate a digital output in order to increase the frequency duringsynchronization.

1014. - freq. lower event . Use this event to activate a digital output in order to lower the frequency duringsynchronization.



Service Manual


1015. - vol t. higher event . Use this event to activate a digital output in order to increase the voltage duringsynchronization.

1016. - vol t. lower event . Use this event to activate a digital output in order to lower the voltage duringsynchronization.

1017. - phase regu.active at :The phase regulation can be used to regulate the phase to zero if the two frequenciesbecome nearly equal and the phase angle is nearly constant.If this parameter is set to 0 the phase regulator will be always inactive. Otherwise, if thisparameter is set to a value > 0 the speed push (parameter [1010]) will be always inactiveand the phase regulator will be activated in the following way:If the difference between the two frequencies reaches this low limit (parameter [1017]), thephase regulator becomes active. The phase regulator remains active so long the differenceis under the limit of the “MAX of frequencies diff.” (Parameters [1002]) then the frequencyregulator becomes again active (parameters [1017] < parameters [1002]).

1018. - phase 360 deg pulse :The pulse time for phase regulation is set here. The pulse time, which the phase regulatorcalculates after the break time (parameter [1009]), is modified by the actual phase angle.The formula for the pulse is: pulse (sec) = (Parameter [1018] * deg) / 360.

1019. - closing direction :The main breaker closing command will be given only when the engine speed is higher(UP), lower (DOWN) or in both directions (see also figure 3-13 and 3-14).

1020. - CB closing delay :The main breaker closing delay is the mechanical delay time caused by the closing time ofcontactors, relays and the main breaker itself. This delay time can reduce the time period of

“breaker synchron on command” (event [1023]).

1021. - live/dead cond. check :ON/OFF-switch for dead condition check; if the synchronizing unit recognizes one side(feeder or BUS) below the voltage limit of parameter [1022] (dead system) and the otherside within the voltage limits parameters [1006] and [1007] and the frequency limitsparameters [1003] and [1004] (live system), then the event [1023] (CB sync.ON) will beactivated without checking synchronization.

NOTE: If Device type - XG/BCG is selected and sync. unit 1 or 2 is active only the BUSwill be checked for dead condition.

1022. - min. vol tage level :If the live/dead condition check (event [1021]) is active and the voltage of one side (feederor BUS) is below this voltage limit the synchronizing unit recognizes dead condition.

1023. - CB sync. ON event . Use this event to send the main breaker close signal. This event will be set if the pointer ofthe synchronization unit is within the synchron window and the synchronization unit is notblocked.

1024. - abnormal BUS1 event . Use this event to indicate BUS abnormal situation. If during synchronization the mainconditions for voltage and frequency are not fulfilled for the BUS then BUS abnormal event

will be set and the corresponding controller for voltage and frequency will be blocked (seeparameters [1003], [1004], [1006] and [1007]).



Service Manual


Figure 3-16 shows the conditions that have to be fulfilled during synchronizing to set the “CBsynchron event” (event [1023]). The parameter and event numbers correspond to SynchronizingUnit 1 (feeder to BUS1).


NOTE: In the case that the voltages of both systems are “alive” and one system has negativesequence, the synchronizer will be internally blocked and event [2949] gets active (usethis event for an alarm). If both systems have negative sequence the synchronizingprocess is not blocked.

Main condition for „MB ON” command

&

SYNCHR. UNIT 1 ONParameter [1000]

UBUS1 > UMIN Parameter [1006]

UBUS1 < UMAX Parameter [1007]

FBUS1 > FMIN Parameter [1003]

FBUS1 < FMAX

Parameter [1004]

≥ 1

Freq. Ctrl. releaseFreq. Ctrl. release

abnormal BUSEvent [1024]

act. Phase angle

< Parameter [1001]

UBUS1-UFeeder

< Parameter [1002]

UBUS1-UFeeder < Parameter [1005]

MB closecommand(here Parameter[1029] „both“Event [1023]



Service Manual


The figures 3-13 and 3-14 show the closing direction philosophy. If closing direction “UP”(parameter [1019]) is selected and if the feeder frequency is higher than the BUS frequency thenthe main breaker synchron close command will be given (see figure 3-17).

Figure 3-17 ANSI 25 /A-8

If closing direction “DOWN” (parameter [1019]) is selected and if the feeder frequency is lower thanthe BUS frequency then the main breaker synchron close command will be given (see figure 3-18).

Figure 3-18 ANSI 25 /A-9

FBus

Fmax; Para [1004]

Fmin; Para

Time

Frequency

Closing direction: „DOWN“(FFeeder > FBus)Phase angle Cursor direction: to the right

1: No “C. B. ON” Command2: “C. B. ON” Command, allowed if Phase synchron and voltage O.K.

FFeeder

222 1111

Synchronizing window

Synchronizing window

FBus

Fmax; Para [1004]

2 2 1 2211 Time1

Fmin; Para [1003]

Frequency

1: No “C. B. ON” Command2: “C. B. ON” Command, allowed if Phase synchron and voltage O.K.

FFeeder

Closing direction: „UP“(FFeeder < FBUS)

Phase angle Cursor direction: to the left



Service Manual


3.4 ANSI 27 – Undervol tage Relay

The undervoltage relay is a relay that operates when its input voltage is less than a predeterminedvalue.Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some of whichcould be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Undervoltage protection isgenerally used for load shedding and loss of phase purposes (see figure 3-19).

Figure 3-19 ANSI 27


1100. Undervol tage relay :This parameter activates the undervoltage supervision, whereby:

• “OFF”: deactivates,

• “ON”: activates, and

• “CB ON”: activates the undervoltage supervision only if the circuit breaker is switchedon.

1101. - Undervol tage 1. limit :First limit of the set point for undervoltage

1102. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1101]; use this event to activate an output.

1103. - Undervol tage 2. limit :Second limit of the set point for undervoltage

1104. - Time delay (defini te) :Time delay of event [1103]; use this event to activate an output.

1105. - MIN start vol tage :This parameter depends on the device type.

Device type BC or X:

During the startup sequence, this limit must be reached in order to activate theundervoltage protection.

ANSI 27 Undervol t age r el ay

1100. Undervol t age r el ay : OFF1101. - Under vol t age 1. l i mi t : 95. 0 %1102. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 2. 00 sec1103. - Under vol t age 2. l i mi t : 93. 0 %1104. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 3. 00 sec1105. – Mi n. star t vol t age : 90. 0 %1106. – Mi n. f r equency : 55. 0 Hz

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ CB ON0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 03- 99. 99 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 03- 99- 99 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 99. 9 Hz

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


Device type BCG or XG: This parameter is not active, since the undervoltage relay works when the main breaker ison; otherwise, it is blocked.

1106. - MIN frequency :This parameter depends on the device type.

Device type BC or X:When the feeder frequency is lower than this setting, the undervoltage protection functionis disabled.

Device type BCG or XG:This parameter is not active, since the undervoltage relay works when the main breaker ison; otherwise, it is blocked.

Figure 3-20 Logic diagram for the undervoltage protection

Setting 1105

Startup U > 3 ~

Setting 1106

Minimum f > 3 ~

&

27 - 1 Pickup 1101

U < 3 ~

„1“

off

on

1100 27 active

U << 3 ~

27 - 2 Pickup 1103

27 - 1 Delay 1102

27 - 1 Trip 1102

&

&

27 - 2 Delay 1104

0 T | |

0 T | |

1104 - 2 Trip

ANSI 27

P

E

P

P

P

E

E

E

E

P

P

Limit reached 1101

1103 Limit reached



Service Manual


3.5 ANSI 27 B – BUS undervol tage relay

There are two independent undervoltage relays for the BUS1 and BUS2 measure inputs available(see figure 3-21). The undervoltage (BUS) relay operates when its input voltage from BUS side isless than a predetermined value. Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally lowvoltage conditions, some of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse,etc.). Undervoltage protection is generally used for load shedding and loss of phase purposes.

Figure 3-21 ANSI 27 B


The parameters for the BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in thefollowing only the BUS1 parameters are described:

1120. BUS1 undervol tage relay :The enable switch for the undervoltage relay

1121. - Undervol tage 1. limit :First limit of the set point for undervoltage; this event number can be used for an alarmprewarning.

1122. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1121]; use the event [1122] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

1123. - Undervol tage 2. limit :Second limit of the set point for under voltage; this event number can be used for an alarmprewarning.


1125. - Minimum startvoltage :1126. - Minimum frequency :

If the startvoltage is reached by all 3 phases and the frequency limit is reached theundervoltage relay remains always active until power on reset.

ANSI 27 B Bus undervol t age rel ay

1120. BUS1 undervol t age rel ay: OFF1121. - Under vol t age 1. l i mi t : 95. 0 %1122. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec1123. - Under vol t age 2. l i mi t : 93. 0 %1124. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 3. 0 sec1125. – Mi ni mum st ar t vol t age: 90. 0 %1126. – Mi ni mum f r equency : 55. 0 Hz

1110. BUS2 undervol t age r el ay: ON1111. - Under vol t age 1. l i mi t : 95. 0 %1112. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec1113. - Under vol t age 2. l i mi t : 93. 0 %1114. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 3. 0 sec1115. – Mi ni mum st ar t vol t age: 90. 0 %1116. – Mi ni mum f r equency : 55. 0 Hz

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 99. 9 Hz

ON/ OFF0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 99. 9 Hz

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.6 ANSI 32 – Overload Relay

Figure 3-22 ANSI 32


1130.Overload relay :The overload relay can be deactivated/activated by the following setting options:

“OFF“: the overload relay is disabled,

“ON“: the overload relay is enabled; characteristic values for limits (parameters [1131,1133, 1135 1137] refer to “reverse power” or “active power”,

“ON_S“: the overload relay is enabled; characteristic value for limits (parameters [1131,1133, 1135 1137] refers to “apparent power S”.

1131. - 1. limit reverse power :First limit of the reverse power relay; if the reverse power exceeds this limit event [1131] willbe set.

1132. - Delay time (defini te) :If event [1131] is active and the corresponding delay time is passed event [1132] will be set.Use this event to activate an output.

1133. - 2. limit reverse power :Second limit of the reverse power relay; if the reverse power exceeds this limit event [1133]will be set. Use this event to activate an output.

1134. - Delay time (defini te) :If event [1133] is active and the corresponding delay time is passed event [1134] will be set.Use this event to activate an output.

1135. - 1. limit active power :First limit of the active power relay; if the active power exceeds this limit event [1135] will beset.

1136. - Delay time ( defin ite) :If event [1135] is active and the corresponding delay time is passed event [1136] will be set.Use this event to activate an output.

ANSI 32 Over l oad r el ay

1130. Over l oad r el ay : OFF

1131. – 1. l i mi t r ever se power : 10. 0 %1132. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec1133. – 2. l i mi t r ever se power : 15. 0 %1134. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 0. 5 sec 1135. – 1. l i mi t act i ve power : 100. 0 %1136. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 1. 0 sec1137. – 2. l i mi t act i ve power : 120. 0 %1138. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 0. 5 sec1139. Bl ock r everse power : 0

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ ON_S

0. 1- 99. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 1- 99. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 1- 199. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0. 1- 199. 9 %0. 1- 99. 9 sec0- 9999 Event number

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1137. - 2. limit active power :Second limit of the active power relay; if the active power exceeds this limit event [1137] willbe set. Use this event to activate an output.

1138. - Delay time (defini te) :If event [1137] is active and the corresponding delay time is passed event [1138] will be set.

Use this event to activate an output.

1139. Block reverse power :The reverse power protection (parameters [1131] to [1134]) is disabled if the event setunder parameter [1139] is active.



Service Manual


3.7 ANSI 37 – Undercurrent Relay (motor)

Figure 3-23 ANSI 37


1140. Undercurrent relay :If the undercurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1141. - Min. current limit :1142. - Max. current limit :

If one of the three current phases is between these current limits (parameters [1141] and

[1142]) the events [1141] and [1142] will be activated.

1143. - Delay time (defini te) :If the undercurrent relay is active and the corresponding delay time is passed theundercurrent relay will be tripped (event [1143] will be activated).

ANSI 37 Undercurr ent r el ay ( motor)

1140. Undercur r el ay : OFF

1141. – Mi n. cur r ent l i mi t : 12. 0 %1142. – Max. cur r ent l i mi t : 45. 0 %1143. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 10. 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF

0. 1- 199. 9 %0. 1- 199. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.8 ANSI 40 Q – Loss of Excitation Relay

Field relay is a relay that functions on a given or abnormally low value or failure of machine fieldcurrent, or on an excessive value of the reactive component of armature current in an AC-machineindicating abnormally low field excitation.When partial or complete loss of excitation occurs on a synchronous machine, (ind.) reactivepower flows from the system into the machine.

There are two measuring principles to detect “loss of field” status:

• 40 Q: The first measuring principle of this relay is to detect only the quantity anddirection of the reactive power. If the inductive reactive power exceeds adefinite limit, then the “ANSI 40 Q loss of excitation relay” will be activated.

• 40: The second measuring principle is to define the impedance circle area inwhichthe actual measured impedance vector must be within the “ANSI 40. lossof excitation” circle before the appropriate relay will be activated.

NOTE: For the impedance measurement, the phase current I1 and the line voltages

U31 and U12 will be evaluated.

Two impedance circles can be defined, one for the static and the other for the dynamicalcharacteristic.

Figure 3-24 ANSI 40 Q-1


1170. Loss of excitation relay :If the loss of excitation relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1171. - reactive power limit :If the inductive reactive power exceeds this limit then event [1171] will be activated. Thepercentage setting of the inductive reactive power refers to the active power PN.

1172. - delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1171]; if event [1171] is active and this delay time is passed then

event [1172] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter[1171]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

ANSI 40 Q Loss of exci t at i on r el ay

1170. Loss of exci t at i on r el ay: OFF1171. – r eact i ve power l i mi t : 35. 0 %1172. – del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 4. 0 sec1173. – mi n. vol t age : 70. 0 %

1174. Ci r cl e 1 : ON1175. – di ameter: 4. 0 Ohm1176. – of f set : 1. 0 Ohm1177. – del ay : 1. 5 sec1178. Ci r cl e 2 : ON1179. – di ameter: 2. 2 Ohm1180. – of f set : 1. 5 Ohm1181. – del ay : 0. 5 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 %

ON/ OFF0. 1- 999. 9 Ohm0. 1- 999. 9 Ohm0. 1- 999. 9 secON/ OFF0. 1- 999. 9 Ohm0. 1- 999. 9 Ohm0. 1- 999. 9 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1173. - min. vol tage :Three-phase feeder voltage supervision; the feeder voltage must be higher than this settingin order to activate this protection.

1174. Circle 1 :1175. - diameter :

1176. - offset :1177. - delay :

• ON/OFF switch of circle 1: Activation of first impedance circle parameter [1174]; the Impedance Circle 1 will beactivated by setting this parameter to “ON.”

• Impedance circle definition: The impedance area of the Circle 1 will be defined with the offset parameter [1175] anddiameter parameter [1176]. If the actual measured impedance is within this area event[1174] will be activated.

• Definite delay time: If the actual measure impedance is within Circle 1 and this definite delay time ispassed then event [1177] will be activated as long as the actual measured impedancemoves out of Impedance Circle 1. Please use parameter [1177] for the alarm or outputcontroller.

1178. Circle 2 :1179. - diameter :1180. - offset :1181. - delay :

Same parameter setting as parameters [1174] to [1177]; normally, Circle 1 will be used forsupervision the static, Circle 2 for the dynamical characteristic.

Figure 3-25 ANSI 40 Q-2 trip area for loss of field supervision

r2C2

X

R

Offset 2 Parameter [1180] Offset 1Parameter [1176]

Diameter 2 Parameter [1179]

Whereby: r2 = Diameter 2/2C2= Offset2+Diameter 2/2

Circle 2

Circle 1

Diameter 1

Parameter [1179]



Service Manual


3.9 ANSI 46 – Negative Sequence Relay

Negative sequence or phase balance current relay is a relay function in which the polyphasecurrents are of reverse-phase sequence or the polyphase currents are unbalanced or containnegative sequence components above a given amount.

Figure 3-26 ANSI 46


1200. Reverse phase relay :If a negative sequence (a rotating field in opposition to the normal rotating field) appears

the value in percent is measured to the nominal rated current.If the negative sequence relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If it is setto “RECLOSE” it opens and closes the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1201. - Limi t value :First limit of the negative sequence current

1202. - Time mul tip lier (TMS) :Time setting of the time multiplier for the IDMT curve

1203. - Curve shape :Select definite time or normal inverse curve (IDMT curve)

1204. - Min. feeder vol tage :The feeder voltage must be higher than this setting in order to activate this protectionfunction.

1205. - 1. limit :Second limit of the set point for reverse phase balance


1207. - 2. limit :

Third limit of the set point for reverse phase balance

1208. - Delay time(definite) :Time delay of event [1208]; use this event to activate an output.

ANSI 46 Rever se phase rel ay

1200. Reverse phase r el ay : OFF1201. – Li mi t val ue : 95. 0 %1202. - Ti me mul t i pl i er ( TMS) : 2. 00 sec1203. - Cur ve shape : def i ni t e1204. - Mi n. f eeder vol t age : 3. 0 %1205. – 1. l i mi t : 10. 0 %1206. – Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 1000 ms1207. – 2. l i mi t : 12. 0 %1208. – Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 500 ms

1209. – Vol t . r est r ai n[ 51VR] : OFF

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ r ecl ose0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 99. 99 secnor m. i nver se & def i ni t e t i me1. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 99. 9 %0- 9999 ms0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 0- 9999 ms

ON/ OFF

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1209. - Volt. restrain [51VR] :If the voltage restrain function should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. The settingof the low voltage limit is 10% fixed. If the voltage restrain function is active the current setpoint will be reduced by the voltage as shown in figure 3-23.

0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 %

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1

Voltage

C u r v e P i

c k u p M u l t i p l i e r

Figure 3-27 Diagram of the voltage restrain calculation curve



Service Manual


Figure 3-28 Logic diagram for the reverse phase/balance protection

Limit reached 46 - 2

Pickup 1207 1207 46 - 2

Delay 1208

0 T | |

1200 46 active

IDMT Curve 1203

&

„1“ off on

ANSI 46

reclose ≥1

TMS 1202 S1 Q R

& 3~

VR_EN


Pickup 1205 1205 46 - 1

Delay 1206

0 T | |&

3~ VR_EN

Limit reached 1201

46 - TMS Trip 1202 & 3~

VR_EN

Setting 1204

Startup U > 3 ~

Reset

Voltage Restrain

46 - TO

Pickup 1201

on/off

E

E

E

P

E

E

E

E

P

P

P

on/off Reclose

on/off Reclose

on/off Reclose

≥1 Reclose ANSI 79

46 - 1 Trip 1206

46 - 2 Trip 1208



Service Manual


3.10 ANSI 47 – Phase sequence vol tage relay

The phase sequence voltage relay is a relay that functions upon a predetermined value ofpolyphase voltage in the desired phase sequence.

Figure 3-29 ANSI 47


1300. Phase sequence relay :The normal voltage phase sequence is right rotating, that means L1-L2-L3. If the sequenceturns to left rotating or one phase is missing the relay becomes active.

If the negative sequence relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1301. -.Limit value :If the left rotating field exceeds the limit the phase sequence relay will be activated.

1302. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay for event [1301]; use this event to activate an output.

ANSI 47 Phase sequence vol t age r el ay1300. Phase sequence rel ay : OFF1301. - Li mi t val ue : 20. 0 %1302. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 2. 00 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF1. 0- 199. 9 %0. 01- 99. 99 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.11 ANSI 49 – Thermal Overload

The thermal overload relay is divided in 3 independent sections (see figures 3-30, 3-31 and 3-32,and 3-33). Any of the sections can be activated and used independently of each other.

3.11.1 Thermal overload I (general)

This section calculates a thermal image in accordance to the current (see figure 3-30).



1340. THERMAL OVERLOAD :ON/OFF-switch for thermal overload protection

1341. - Nominal rated current [xxxx]A :Overload current of the nominal rated current of the motor; pickup value for thermal motorprotection 49; if the current reaches this limit event [1341] will be set.

1342. - Cold limit at 6*In :This parameter is required to calculate τh. This trip time is taken from the cold curve of themotor. The trip time in the curve is taken from 6*In.

1343. - Hot limit at 6*In :This parameter is required to set the characteristic of the hot curve and limit the thermalimage value.

1344. - tc/th :The relationship between τ of the hot and the cold curve is required to calculate τc.

1345. - Trip time reset delay :If the trip time is active and the actual current is below the nominal rated (set withparameter [1341]) the time value will be held for this time before reset.

ANSI 49 Thermal over l oad

1340. THERMAL OVERLOAD : OFF1341. – Rated curr ent [ 1000] A : 20. 0 %1342. - Col d l i mi t at 6*I n : 10. 0 sec1343. - Hot l i mi t at 6*I n : 20. 0 sec1344. – t c / t h : 5. 0

1345. – Tr i p t i me r eset del ay: 10. 0 sec1346. - Event f or t r i p t i me- t c ( cal cul at ed) = 16. 7 mi n- t h ( cal cul at ed) = 11. 1 mi n- Prel oad at 6*I n ( T6h) = 67. 0 %

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 1- 999. 9 %0. 1…999. 9 sec ( 0. 25 sec st eps)0. 1…999. 9 sec ( 0. 25 sec st eps) 0. 1- 99. 9

0. 1- 999. 9 secEvent onl yCal cul at ed f r om [ 1342] &[ 1344]Cal cul at ed f r om [ 1342]Cal cul at ed f r om [ 1343]

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1346. - Event for trip time :If the trip time is passed according to the thermal overload conditions event [1346] will beset. Choose this event to initiate a trip signal by using a binary output.

- tc (calculated) :Calculated value τc. Result of the formula:

- th (calculated) :Calculated value τh . Result of the formula:

The time t will be taken from the cold curve of the motor at six times the nominal ratedcurrent. The threshold factor k is fixed with 1.03. The result of τh is calculated as follows:

- Preload at 6*In (T6h) :Calculated maximum preload value with the formula:

The time will be taken from the hot curve of the motor at six times the nominal rated current. Thethreshold factor k is fixed with 1.03. The result is the maximum preload value which will be limitedby the hot curve of the motor.

The relationship is:

2

Pr Pr )/(* In I k ee =Θ

The thermal image of the motor will be calculated all the time and follows the formula:

−

Θ−Θ+Θ=Θ τ

t

S C S e*)((%)

with:ΘC: the current motor imageΘS: thermal status destination, which will be calculated with (Iactual/In)²τ: Tau: During heating τh and during cooling, τc will be used.

[ ] hc parameter τ τ *1344=

( )( )

−

=

22

2

/

/ln

k In I

In I

t hτ

( )( )

−

=

22

2

)03.1(6

6ln

])1342[(6 parameter cT hτ

( )

( ) ( )2222

Pr 22

2Pr

2

)/(*)/()/(/

)/(/ln* k In I e In I In I

k In I

In I In I t h

t

e

e

h −−=⇒

−

−= τ

τ

( )22

])1343[6

22

Pr 03.1)6(*)6()/( −−=

h

hT

e e In I τ

motor theof imagethermaltheiswhichtorelates In I e Θ2Pr )/(



Service Manual


If the actual motor current exceeds the limit of parameter [1341] (rated current) the trip timeintegrator will be activated. The tripping time t of the thermal overload relay is calculated accordingto the following formula and to the corresponding preload value (IPre/IN)²:

with:I: the actual measured currentIN: the thermal overload (set with parameter [1341])k: the threshold factor (1.03)

( )

( )

−

−=

²/

)/(/ln*

2

2Pr

2

k I I

I I I I t

N

N e N

cτ



Service Manual


3.11.2 Thermal overload II (user)

This section gives the user the possibility to define his own curve with 10 current/time points.Between these points, the time values will be linear interpolated (see figures 3-31 and 3-32).




1350. THERMAL OVERLOAD (user) :OFF/ON-switch for this relay section. If the relay is tripped event [1350] will be set.

1351. - integrator reset mode :Defines the reset mode of the time integrator if the current falls below the limit of parameter[1353]:

• “hold time”: The integrator will be reset if the time of parameter [1352] has passed.

• “depending”: The integrator will be integrated downwards with the last excitation time.This time can be limited with parameter [1352].

ANSI 49 Thermal over l oad↑

1362. - t i me: 120. 0 sec1363. - cur r ent poi nt 5: 180. 0 %1364. - t i me: 30. 0 sec1365. - cur r ent poi nt 6: 230. 0 %1366. - t i me: 10. 0 sec1367. - cur r ent poi nt 7: 400. 0 %1368. - t i me: 3. 0 sec1369. - cur r ent poi nt 8: 0. 0 %1370. - t i me: 0. 0 sec1371. - cur r ent poi nt 9: 0. 0 %1372. - t i me: 0. 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec

BACK EXI T

ANSI 49 Thermal over l oad1350. THERMAL OVERLOAD ( user ) : ON1351. - i nt egr ator r eset mode: dependi ng1352. - i nt egr at or hol d t i me : 300. 0 sec1353. - cur r ent l i mi t : 110. 0 %1354. - t i me: 3600. 0 sec1355. - cur r ent poi nt 1: 111. 0 %1356. - t i me: 1800. 0 sec1357. - cur r ent poi nt 2: 114. 0 %1358. - t i me: 900. 0 sec1359. - cur r ent poi nt 3: 123. 0 %

1360. - t i me: 300. 0 sec1361. - cur r ent poi nt 4: 145. 0 %↓

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ONhol d t i me/ dependi ng0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %

0. 0- 6553. 5 sec0. 0- 6553. 5 %

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1352. - integrator hold time :Hold time for the integrator if the current falls below the limit of parameter [1353].

1353. - current limit :Excitation limit for the time integration and the starting point of the curve; if the currentreaches this limit, the time integration will be activated.

1354. - time :The max. trip time for limit parameter [1353]

1355. - current point 1 :1356. - time :

to1371. - current point 9 :1372. - time :

Every point consists of one current limit and the related time (max. trip time for the currentat this point). If the current is between two limits the related time will be linearly calculated.The limits must be ascending, beginning at the first point. If a limit is 0 the curve will betruncated at the previous limit (see figure 3-29).

Example:

Figure 3-33 Current/time curve of thermal overload II

I (%)

t

400

300

200

100

3600180090030012030103

× P [1363] and P [1364]

× P [1361] and P [1362]

× P [1359] and P [1360]

× P [1357] and P [1358]

× P [1355] and P [1356]

× P [1353] and P [1354]



Service Manual


3.11.3 Thermal overload III (interval)

This section gives the user the possibility to define a interval time in which the current has adefined allow time for remaining above a limit.



1373. INTERVAL PROTECTION :Event-switch for this relay section

• Event active: The function will be activated.

• Event inactive: The function will be reset.

If the relay is tripped event [1373] will be activated.

1374. - current limit :If the current reaches this limit the time integration will be activated.

1375. - allow time :If the integration reaches this time limit the relay will trip and the event [1373] will beactivated.

1376. - interval time :The allow time is only valid within this interval time. If one of the integrated periods overlapsthis interval the integrated time will be decreased by the period (if the current is below thelimit of parameter [1374]).

ANSI 49 Thermal over l oad1373. I NTERVAL PROTECTI ON : 5241374. - cur r ent l i mi t : 110. 0 %1375. - al l ow t i me : 60 mi n1376. - i nt er val t i me: 12 h

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 9999 Event0. 1- 999. 9 %1- 999 mi n1- 24 h

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.12 ANSI 50 BF – Breaker Failure

Breaker failure relay supervises the circuit breaker.

Figure 3-35 ANSI 50BF


380. Breaker failure relay :ON/OFF - switch for breaker failure protection

1381. - Current limit (CB:OFF) :

If the circuit breaker is off (feedback of circuit breaker or trip command) and a current ishigher then the limit in parameter [1381] the breaker failure relay will be activated.

1382. - Delay time (defini te) :Delay time of breaker failure relay

Figure 3-36 Logic connection of failure relay

CB: off (feedback)>1

Trip command

&

Act. current value > Current limit [1381]

Event[1382]

50BFManual OFF

ANSI 50BF Br eaker f ai l ur e rel ay

1380. Br eaker f ai l ur e r el ay : ON1381. – Cur r ent l i mi t ( CB: OFF) : 10. 0 %1382. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 2 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0- 999. 9 %0- 9999 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.13 ANSI 50 – Instantaneous overcurrent relay

Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-rise relay is a relay that functions instantaneously onexcessive value of current or on an excessive rate of current.

Figure 3-37 ANSI 50


1400. Instantaneous overcurr. :If the instantaneous overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If itis set to “RECLOSE” it closes the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1401. - 1. limit [xxxx]A :First limit setting of instantaneous overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds thislimit event [1401] will be set.

1402. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1401]; if event [1401] is active and this delay time is passed the event[1402] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1401].Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1403. reserved :

1404. - 2. limit [xxxx]A :Second limit setting of instantaneous overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds thislimit event [1404] will be set.

1405. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1404] if event [1404] is active and this delay time is passed the event[1405] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1404].Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1406. reserved :

1407. - Rev. limit [xxxx ]A :

Limit setting of instantaneous overcurrent is active only if the current direction is going intothe reverse direction. If the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1407] will beset.

ANSI 50 I nst ant aneous overcurr ent1400. I nst ant aneous over cur r . : ON1401. - 1. l i mi t [ 3000] A : 300. 0 %1402. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 100 ms1403. r eserved:1404. - 2. l i mi t [ 3000] A : 300. 0 %1405. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 250 ms1406. r eserved:1407. - Rev. l i mi t [ 3000] A : 300. 0 %1408. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 200 ms1409. r eserved:

1410. - I nr ush bl ocki ng : OFF

Set t i ng r ange:ON/ OFF/ r ecl ose2. 0- 2999. 9 %30- 9999 ms

2. 0- 2999. 9 %30- 9999 ms

2. 0- 2999. 9 %30- 9999 ms

ON/ OFF

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



1409. reserved :

1410. - Inrush blocking :The delay times of parameters [1402], [1405] and [1408] can be extended if inrushconditions referring to ANSI 95i are detected.

Figure 3-38 Logic diagram for the instantaneous overcurrent p rotection

Limit reached 50 - Rev Pickup1407

1407 50 - Rev Delay 1408

0 T | |

1400 50 active

50 - 1

Delay 1402

„1“ off on

ANSI 50

reclose ≥1

&

Limit reached 1404 Picku 1404

1404 50 - 2

Delay 1405

0 T | |&

Limit reached 1401

& Inrush EN

Inrush Blocking

50 - 1

Pickup 1401

on/off „1“

0 T | |I > 3~

Inrush EN

I >> 3~

Inrush EN

I > 3~ Rev

P

P

P

E

E

E

E

50 - 1 Trip 1402 E

E

E on/off

Reclose

on/off Reclose

on/off Reclose

≥1 ANSI 79

1408 50 - Rev Trip

Reclose

P

P

P

50 - 2 Tri 1406



Service Manual


3.14 ANSI 50G/N – Ins tantaneous ground overcurrent relay

Instantaneous ground overcurrent or ground rate-of-rise relay is a relay that functionsinstantaneously on excessive value of current or on an excessive rate of current.The permissible setting range of this relay depends upon the hardware (refer to the purchaseinformation of the hardware to get the appropriate internal current transformers).

Figure 3-39 ANSI 50G/N


1420. Inst. ground overcurr. relay :

If the instantaneous ground overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to“OFF”.

1421. - Limit :Limit setting of instantaneous ground overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds theinstantaneous ground overcurrent limit event [1421] will be activated.

The unit of the limit value can be set between “%” and “mA” via parameter [0053]; (see PCParameter tool special parameter).

“%”: If the unit is set to “%” the limit value refers to the nominal-rated current (primaryside) of the feeder (parameter [0200]). The setting range is between 2.0 % and

999.9 %.“mA”: If the unit “mA” is selected the parameters for the nominal-rated value of the feeder

current and the ground current transformer values have no influence on themeasured current.

1422. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1421]; if event [1421] has been activated and the set delay time ispassed then event [1422] will be activated until the measured value falls below the limit ofparameter [1421]. This parameter should be used for the alarm or output controller.

ANSI 50G/ N I nst ant . gr ound over cur r ent

1420. I nst . gr ound over cur r . : ON1421. - Li mi t [ 2000] A: 200. 0 %1422. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 30 ms1423. - Pi ckup t ype ( 50G/ N) : meas. I g1+21424. - I nr ush bl ocki ng : OFF1425. – I o st ab. st ar t I max/ I n: 1. 501426. - st ab. f act or : 0. 251427. – CT sat ur at i on l i mi t : 7. 5

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF2, 0- 2999, 9 % oder 0- 2999, 9 mA30- 9999 ms*

ON/ OFF1. 0 - 20. 00. 01- 1. 000. 0 – 999. 9

* meas. I gnd1/ meas. I g1+2/meas. I nd/ cal cul at edBACK EXI T



Service Manual


1423. - Pickup type (50G/N) :Three different pickup types for instantaneous ground overcurrent can be selected:

• “meas.Ig1+2”: default setting; this parameter should not be changed.

• “meas.Ignd1”: reserved

• “meas.Ignd2”: reserved

1424. - Inrush blocking :The delay time of parameter [1422] can be extended if inrush conditions referring to ANSI95i are detected.

Figure 3-40 Log ic diagram for ANSI 50G/N

NOTE: Following parameters P[1425] bis P[1427] are only valid for the use of distanceprotection function ANSI 21!

1425. – Io stab.start Imax/In :1426 –stab.factor :

As soon as one of the three phase currents exceeds the set value of parameter P[1425],the earth overcurrent will be stabilized according to the following algorithm:

IoStab = Io * (1 – P[1426] ((IPHmax2 – P[1425]2) / IPHmax

2)4)

with:Io: momentary measured earth currentIoStab: stabilized earth current for protection purposes [50G, 51G, 67GS]IPHmax : maximum value of the measured phase currents IPh1…3

1427. CT-Saturation limit : As soon as one of the three phase currents exceeds the set value of parameter P[1427],the earth overcurrent alarm will be blocked.

1420 50G/N active

50G/N Delay 1422

„1“ off on

ANSI 50G/N

&

Limit reached 1421

& 0 T | |50G/N Trip 1422 E

50G/N Pickup 1421

I > ANSI 95i

Inrush blocking

P P

E

E



Service Manual


3.15 ANSI 51 – AC time overcurrent relay

AC time overcurrent relay is a relay that operates when its AC input current exceeds apredetermined value and when the input current and operating time are inversely related through asubstantial portion of the performance range.

Figure 3-41 ANSI 51


1500. Time overcurrent relay :If the AC time overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If it is setto “RECLOSE” it closes the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1501. - Limit [xxxx]A :Limit setting of AC time overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event[1501] will be set.

1502. - Time multip lier (TMS) :Time multiplier setting for the corresponding curve shape (see parameter [1503]); if event

[1501] is active and the delay time calculated with the time multiplier and the chosen curveshape is passed the event [1502] will be activated as long as the actual value falls belowthe limit of parameter [1501]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1503. - Curve shape :Curve shape selection of AC time overcurrent; eight curve shapes (normal inverse, veryinverse, extremely inverse, curve D-F, INV-K and VINV-K) can be selected (see Appendix A5).

1504. - Reset characterist ic :Reset characteristic of time overcurrent relay; if the calculated delay time is in process andthe actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1501] then a specialreset characteristic for the actual calculated delay time can be set with this parameter. Thefollowing characteristics are available: none, def./Th, depending, curve D-F (see also Appendix A5).

ANSI 51 AC t i me over cur r ent

1500. Ti me over cur r ent r el ay : ON1501. – Li mi t [ 1000] A : 100. 0 %1502. - Ti me mul t i pl i er ( TMS) : 1. 00 sec1503. - Cur ve shape : ver y i nv1504. - Reset char act er i st i c : def . / Th1505. - 1. l i mi t [ 1200] A : 110. 0 %1506. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 1. 0 sec1507. - 2. l i mi t [ 1400] A : 140. 0 %1508. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 5. 0 sec

1509. - 3. l i mi t [ 1800] A : 180. 0 %1510. – Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 1. 0 sec1511. – Reset char act er ( Th) : 0 sec1512. – Vol t . r est r ai n [ 51VR] : OFF1513. – Vol t . Low l i mi t : 10 %1514. – Del ay pi ckup i n cycl es: 101515. – Bl ock pr ot ect i on by : 10 ev.

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ r ecl ose2. 0- 2999. 9 %0. 03- 10. 00 sec8 cur ve shapes ( I DMT)none, def . / Th, dep. , cur ve D- F2. 0- 2999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec2. 0- 2999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

2. 0- 2999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec0- 99 secON/ OFF10- 90 %0- 99990- 9999 ev.

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


In addition to the AC time overcurrent relay operating with inverse curve shapes, three furtherlimits with definite times can be used (parameters [1505] to [1510]).

1505. - 1. limit [xxxx]A :First additional current limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1505] willbe set.


1507. - 2. limit [xxxx]A :Second additional current limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1507]will be set.

1508. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1507]; if event [1507] is active and this delay time is passed the event

[1508] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1507].Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1509. - 3. limit [xxxx]A :Third additional current limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1509]will be set.


1511. - Reset character (Th) :Holding time for reset characteristic if parameter [1504] is set to “def./Th”; if the calculateddelay time is in process and the actual measured current value falls below the limit ofparameter [1501] then the calculated delay time is hold for this time.



Service Manual


1512. - Volt. restrain [51VR] :Parameter [1512] activates the voltage restrain function. If voltage restrain function is activethe Current limits ([1501], [1505], [1507] and [1509]) will be reduced proportional to therelationship actual voltage to nominal voltage, as shown in the Figures 3-42 and 3-43.

0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 %

0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

0,9

1

Voltage

C u r v e P i c k u p M u l t i p l i e r

1513P

1513P Voltage low limit for ANSI 51

Figure 3-42 Pickup value calculation curve of the voltage restrain function

1513. - Volt. low limit :

The low voltage parameter limits the voltage restrain function to a minimum value (seeFigure 3-42).

1514. - Delay pickup in cycles :

1515. - Block protection by : AC time overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any active event. Forblocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [1515].Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active.



Service Manual


Figure 3-43 Logic diagram for the AC time overcurrent protection


Pickup 1509 1509

Reset Char . 1511

51 - 1 Delay 1506

&

„1“

off on

ANSI 51

reclose ≥1

& 3~

VR_EN


Pickup 1507 1507 51 - 2

Delay 1508

& 3~ VR_EN

Limit reached 1505

& 3~

VR_EN

51

-

TOC Pickup

1501

Voltage Restrain

51 - 1

Pickup 1505

on/off

3~ VR_EN

IDMT Curve 1503

TMS 1502

Limit reached 1501

51 - 3

Delay 1510

Reset Char . 1511

Reset Char . 1511

Reset Char . 1504

t

I

1500 51 active

E

E

E

E

51 - 1 Trip 1506 E

E

E on/off

Reclose

on/off Reclose

on/off Reclose

≥1 Reclose ANSI 79

on/off Reclose

51 - TOC Trip 1502 E

P

P

P

P

P

P

E P

P

P

51 - 2 Trip 1508

51 - 3 Trip 1510



Service Manual


3.16 ANSI 51G/N – AC time ground overcurrent relay

Inverse time overcurrent protection 51G/N contains ANSI characteristic curves (IDMT).The permissible setting range of this relay is depending on the ordered hardware. Refer to theorder information to get the right internal current transformers for your application.

Figure 3-44 ANSI 51G/N


1520. Time ground overcurrent :If the AC time ground overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1521. - Limit [xxxx] A :Limit setting of AC time ground overcurrent; if the actual measured value exceeds this limitevent [1521] will be set.

1522. - Time multip lier (TMS) :Time multiplier setting for the corresponding curve shape (see parameter [1523]); if event[1521] is active and the delay time calculated with the time multiplier and the chosen curveshape is passed, the event [1522] will be activated as long as the actual value falls belowthe limit of parameter [1521]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1523. - Curve shape :

Curve shape selection of AC time ground overcurrent; eight curve shapes (normal inverse,very inverse, extremely inverse, curve D-F, INV-K and VINV-K) can be selected (see

Appendix A5).

1524. - Reset characterist ic :Reset characteristic of time overcurrent relay; if the calculated delay time is in process andthe actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter [1521] then a specialreset characteristic for the actual calculated delay time can be set with this parameter. Thefollowing characteristics are available: none, def./Th, depending, curve D-F (see also Appendix A5).

1525. - Reset character (Th) :

Holding time for reset characteristic if parameter [1524] is set to “def./Th”. If the calculateddelay time is in process and the actual measured current value falls below the limit ofparameter [1521] then the calculated delay time is hold for this time.

ANSI 51G/ N AC t i me gr ound over cur r ent

1520. Ti me ground over cur r ent : ON1521. – Li mi t [ 1000] A : 100. 0 %1522. - Ti me mul t i pl i er ( TMS) : 1. 00 sec1523. - Cur ve shape : ver y i nv.1524. - Reset char act er i st i c : def . / Th1525. – Reset char act er ( Th) : 0 sec1526. - Pi ckup t ype ( 51G/ N) : meas. I gnd1

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF2. 0- 999. 9 %0. 01- 10 sec8 cur ve shapes ( I DMT)none, def . / Th, dep. , cur ve D- F0- 99 secmeas. I gnd1/ measI g1+2/ meas. I gnd2/cal cul at ed

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1526. - Pickup type (51G/N) :Two different types of the AC time ground overcurrent pickup can be selected. The first oneis measured and the second is calculated.



Service Manual


3.17 ANSI 51 LR – Locked Rotor

Figure 3-45 ANSI 51 LR


1540. Locked rotor relay :If the locked rotor protection should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1541. - Starting current :During starting phase of the motor, the current will be limited with extremely inversecharacteristic. The time multiplier Tm (see figure 3-46) will be calculated with the starting

current [1541] and the starting time [1542].The trip time formula for the extremely inverse characteristic is:

( )( )

80

1/]1541[*]1542[

1/

80*

2

2

−=⇒

−=

In parameter parameter Tm

In I Tmt

Tm value will be displayed in the last line.

1542. - Starting time :Because of the starting time, the time multiplier will be calculated. (see parameter [1542]).The stating phase will be limited by two times this setting. Use the event [1542] for a binary

output or an alarm.

1543. - Locked rotor current :During the running state of the motor, the trip time characteristic is definite. If the actualmeasured value exceeds this limit event [1543] will be set.

1544. - Locked rotor time :Time delay of event [1543]; if event [1543] is active and this delay time is passed the event[1544] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1543].Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

ANSI 51LR Locked r otor (motor )

1540. Locked r ot or r el ay : ON

1541. – St ar t i ng cur r ent : 300. 0 %1542. – St ar t i ng t i me : 10. 0 sec1543. – Locked r ot or cur r ent : 200. 0 %1544. – Locked r ot or t i me : 8. 0 sec

Tm ( cal cul at ed) = 1. 00 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF

10- 999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec10- 999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 seccal cul at ed f r om [ 1541] & [ 1542]

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


Extremely Inverse Trip Time haracteristic

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

100000

1 10 P.U2 20

t (S)

Start current

Parameter [1541]

Starting time

Parameter [1542

51 LR

Motor state: Starting

Figure 3-46 Inverse time characteristic du ring starting phase. The extremely inverse curve for triptime wil l be defined by parameters [1541] and [1542]

5 LR Trip Time Characteristics

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

1 2 PU651LR time

Parameter [1544]

51 LR

Motor state: Running

51 LR current

Parameter [1543]

Figure 3-47 Definite time characteristic dur ing running state of the motor. The time characteristic

will be defined by parameters [1543] and [1544]



Service Manual


3.18 ANSI 59 – Overvol tage relay

The overvoltage relay operates when the actual measured voltage is more than a pre-determinedvalue.The overvoltage protection has the task of preventing insulation failure by protecting againstabnormally high voltage levels. Abnormally high voltages often occur in low loaded, long distancetransmission lines, in islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full loadshutdown of a generator from the system.

Figure 3-48 ANSI 59


1600. Overvol tage relay :If the overvoltage relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”. If it is set to“RECLOSE” it will close the breaker according to the setting of ANSI 79.

1601. - 1. Limi t value :First overvoltage limit; the activation of this limit value depends on the curve shapeselection of parameter [1603]:

• “normal inverse”: If the actual measured voltage value plus 5% (k-factor) exceeds thislimit event [1601] will be set.

• “definite”: If the actual measured voltage value exceeds this limit event [1601]

will be set. No k-factor will be calculated.

1602. - Time multip lier (TMS) :Delay time setting for overvoltage 1. limit; the characteristic of the delay time depends onthe curve shape selection of parameter [1603]:

• “normal inverse”: If normal inverse curve shape is selected this parameter will be usedas time multiplier.

• “definite”: If the curve shape is set to definite and if event [1601] is active, thena definite delay time will be activated.

Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

ANSI 59 Over vol t age rel ay

1600. Over vol t age r el ay : ON1601. - 1. Li mi t val ue : 110. 0 %1602. - Ti me mul t i pl i er ( TMS) : 1. 00 sec1603. - Cur ve shape : def i ni t e1604. r eserved :1605. - 2. Li mi t val ue : 110. 0 %

1606. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 1. 00 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ r ecl ose1- 999. 9 %0. 01- 10 secnor mal i nver se/ def i ni t e

0- 999. 9 %

0. 01- 999. 99 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1603. - Curve shape :Curve shape selection of overvoltage; one curve shape (normal inverse) and one definitelimit can be selected. Parameter [1602] is the time multiplier if the normal inverse curve isselected. If this parameter is set to “definite” then a definite time delay can be activated.

1604. reserved :

1605. - 2. Limi t value :Second overvoltage limit; if the actual measured value exceeds this limit event [1605] willbe set.

1606. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1605]; if event [1605] is active and this delay time is passed, the event[1606] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1605].Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

Figure 3-49 Logic diagram for the overvoltage protection

Limit reached 59N Pickup 1611

U > 3 ~

1610 59N active

1611 59N Delay 1612

& 0 T | |

„1“ off on

ANSI 59N

reclose or

59 - 1

Pickup 1601

U > 3 ~

1600 59 active

IDMT Curve 1603

&

„1“ off on

ANSI 59

reclose or

59 - 2

Pickup 1605

U >> 3 ~

5 - 2

Dela 1606

& 0 T | |

TMS 1602

E

E

59 - 1 Tri 1602 E

E

on/off Reclose

on/off Reclose

on/off Reclose

≥1 ANSI 79 Reclose

P

E

E

E

P

P

E P

Limit reached 1601

P Limit reached 1605 P

59 - 2 Trip 1606

P

59 - N Trip 1612



Service Manual


3.19 ANSI 59 B – BUS overvoltage relay

There are two independent overvoltage relays for the BUS1 and BUS2 measure inputs available.The overvoltage relay operates when the actual measured voltage is more than a predeterminedvalue. It prevents insulation failure by protecting against abnormally high voltage levels. Abnormally high voltages often occur in low-loaded long distance transmission lines, in isolatedsystems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full-load shutdown of a generator from thesystem.

Figure 3-50 ANSI 59 B


The parameters for the BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in thefollowing only the BUS1 parameters are described.

1610. BUS1 overvoltage relay :The enable switch for the overvoltage relay

1611. - Overvol tage 1. limit :First limit of the set point for overvoltage; this event number can be used for an alarmprewarning.

1612. - Delay time (defini te) :

Time delay of event [1611]; use the event [1612] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

1613. - Overvol tage 2. limit :Second limit of the set point for overvoltage; this event number can be used for an alarmprewarning.


ANSI 59 B Bus over vol t age r el ay

1610. BUS1 overvol t age r el ay : ON1611. - Over vol t age 1. l i mi t : 103. 0 %1612. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 8. 0 sec1613. - Over vol t age 2. l i mi t : 110. 0 %1614. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 3. 0 sec1620. BUS2 overvol t age r el ay : OFF

1621. - Over vol t age 1. l i mi t : 103. 0 %1622. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 8. 0 sec1623. - Over vol t age 2. l i mi t : 110. 0 %1624. - Del ay t i me( def i ni t e) : 3. 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secON/ OFF

0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.20 ANSI 64/59N – Overvoltage ground relay

Ground detector relay is a relay that operates on failure of machine or other apparatus insulation toground.Sensitive ground fault detection may be used in isolated or compensated systems to detect groundfaults. In solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground fault detection is used todetect high impedance ground faults. Sensitive ground fault detection may be used for alarmingand acoustic signaling or may be allowed to initiate tripping. By summation of the moment valuesof the single leak voltage (measured from the clip X1-17, 19 and 21) covered against the earth(case) the misalignment tension is calculated:

U0 = ⅓ |Ū1 + Ū2 + Ū3|.

Programmable timers are supplied to supervise the alarming and tripping. For this protectionfunction the SYMAP® must be equipped with a sensitive input transformer. Because of its highsensitivity, ground fault detection is not suited for detection of high magnitude ground faults. Thedirectional and non-directional overcurrent protection functions are preferred for this application.

Figure 3-51 ANSI 64


1700. Ground detector relay :If the ground detector relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1701. - Limit value Ugnd1 :First limit setting of ground overvoltage


1704. - Limit value Ugnd2 :Second limit setting of ground overvoltage


1707. Overvol tage relay [59N] :If the overvoltage relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

ANSI 64/ 59N Over vol t age gr ound r el ay

1700. Gr ound detector r el ay : OFF1701. - Li mi t val ue Ugnd1 : 100. 0 %1702. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 10. 0 sec1703. r eserved:1704. - Li mi t val ue Ugnd2 : 100. 0 %1705. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 10. 0 sec1706. r eserved:1707. Over vol t age r el ay [ 59N] : OFF1708. - 1. Li mi t val ue : 50. 0 %1709. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 1. 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ r ecl ose0. 1- 999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

0. 1- 999. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

ON/ OFF/ r ecl ose0. 1- 100. 0 %0. 01- 999. 99 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1708. - 1. Limi t value :Limit setting of displacement voltage; the voltage will be calculated from the measuredthree-phase system. Example: With a rated of 400 V and a strain of 10 % the permissibledisplacement voltage corresponds 40 V.


Time delay of event [1708]; use this event to activate an output.



Service Manual


3.21 ANSI 66 – Start Inhibi t for Motors

Figure 3-52 ANSI 66


1720. Start inhibi t relay :If the start inhibit relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1721. - Allow time :Defines the period of time in which a number of start attempts are allowed

1722. - Allowed starts :

Number of starts which are allowed within the period of time (parameter [1721])

1723. - Limit time : After the last motor start, the limit time has to be passed before a new start is allowed.

1724. - Thermal limit (0d) :If the thermal load of the motor is higher then this thermal limit no further start attempt isallowed.

1725. - Event for SI :If one of the above conditions for start inhibit (parameters [1721] to [1723]) is fulfilled event[1725] start inhibit will be activated and the SI window in the LCD-display will appear.

NOTE: The events [1721], [1723] and [1724] are only listed in the event history after event[1725] is active and the ON-key is pressed.

Figure 3-53 Start inhibit for motors – overview

1 Actual number of starts ≥ Allowed starts/allow time

Limit time [1723] after last start attempt active

Actual thermal load > thermal limit [1724]

Start Inhibit (SI)

Event 1725

ANSI 66 St ar t i nhi bi t f or mot or s

1720. St ar t i nhi bi t r el ay : OFF

1721. - Al l ow t i me : 30. 0 mi n1722. - Al l owed st ar t s : 21723. - Li mi t t i me : 20. 0 mi n1724. - Ther mal l i mi t ( 0d) : 55 %1725. – Event f or SI

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF

1- 999. 9 mi n1- 501- 999. 9 mi n1- 100 %

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


3.22 ANSI 67 – AC Direct ional Overcurrent Relay

AC directional overcurrent relay is a relay that functions on a desired value of AC overcurrentflowing in a predetermined direction.

When the directional overcurrent stage exceeds the current setting (parameter [1801]) and if the

directional operation has been selected then the directional criteria should activate event [1801]. After the time delay, event [1802] will be activated. These events can be used to activate the alarmcontroller and the binary outputs.The operation of the directional overcurrent stage is based on a definite time or inverse timecharacteristic. This mode of operation is set with parameter [1803]. At definite time mode ofoperation, the operating time is set in 10 msec steps. At inverse time mode of operation (I.D.M.T.),six internally standardized and two special type time/current characteristics are available. Theoperation stage starts if the current on one of the phases exceeds the setting value and if thephase angle between the current and base angle falls within the operation sector +/- 60° and if thephase angle is selected at parameter [1807].The directional control is based on measuring the phase current and the phase voltage. The phase

voltage is recalculated from the line voltage, which means that earth influences at the phasevoltage are eliminated.

Figure 3-54 ANSI 67


1800. AC dir . overcurrent [67] :If the AC directional overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1801. - Limit value [xxxx]A :Limit setting of AC directional overcurrent relay; if one of the three phase currents (I1-I3)exceeds this limit event [1801] will be activated.

ANSI 67 AC di r ect i onal over cur r ent

1800. AC di r . over cur r ent [ 67] : ON1801. – Li mi t val ue [ 1000] A : 100. 0 %1802. - Ti me mul t i pl i er ( TMS) : 1. 00 sec1803. - Cur ve shape : ver y i nv.1804. - Reset char act er i st i c : def . / Th1805. – Reset char act er . ( Th) : 0 sec1806. – Cur r ent di r ect i on : r ever se

1807. – Phase angl e : - 0 °1808. – Vol t age l ow l i mi t : 8 %1809. - del ay pi ckup i n cycl e: 81830. - bl ock pr ot ect i on by : 10

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 1- 999, 9 %0. 01- 10 secnormal i nver se…curve F +def i ni t enone, def . / Th, dep. , cur ve D- F0- 99 secr ever se/ f or war d/ angl e

- 180°- +180°0- 999 %0- 99990- 9999

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1802.- Time multiplier (TMS) :Delay time for directional overcurrent; depending on parameter [1803]; this parameter canbe used as time multiplier for inverse time characteristics or for definite delay time.

Time multiplier:Event [1801] is active and the delay time calculated with the time multiplier and the chosencurve shape (parameter [1803]) is passed, then event [1802] will be activated as long asthe actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1801].

Definite delay time: If the event [1801] is active and this definite delay time is passed then event [1802] will beactivated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1801].Please use parameter [1802] for the alarm or output controller.

1803. - Curve shape :Curve shape selection of AC directional overcurrent; eight curve shapes (normal inverse,very inverse, extremely inverse, curve D-F, INV-K and VINV-K) can be selected (see

Appendix A5).

1804. - Reset characterist ic :Reset characteristic of AC directional overcurrent relay; if the calculated delay time hasbeen activated and the actual measured current value falls below the limit of parameter[1801] then a special reset characteristic for the actual calculated delay time can be set withthis parameter. The following characteristics are available: none, def./Th, depending, curveD-F (see also Appendix A5).

1805. - Reset character. (Th) :Holding time for reset characteristic if parameter [1804] is set to “def./Th”. If the calculateddelay time has been activated and the actual measured current value falls below the limit ofparameter [1801] then the calculated delay time will be on hold for this time.

1806. - Current direction :The operational direction of the directional stage can be selected to be “forward”, “reverse”or “angle”, which means the operational sector will be defined with the angle definition ofparameter [1807] +/-60°.

Figure 3-55 Operation sector when parameter [1806] is set to “ reverse”

U1 IL1

Reverse

direction

U3 U2

Non operationalSector



Service Manual


Figure 3-56 Operation sector when parameter [1806] is set to “ forward”

Figure 3-57 Operational sector when parameter [1806] is set to “ angle” and Parameter[1807] is set to -45°

1807. - phase angle :If the operational direction of the directional stage is selected with “angle” the operationalsector is defined with this parameter +/- 60°.

1808. - voltage low limit :Minimum voltage for relay operation; to secure a reliable relay function, the voltage limit of

this parameter must be exceeded to activate the protection function and to determine theangle between voltage and current.

Figure 3-58 Criteria for ANSI 67 trip

1Phase current > Parameter [1801]

Phase current within operating area Parameter [1806]

Phase voltage > Parameter [1808]

ANSI 67 tripped

Event [1802]

Delay timeParameter [1802]

U1 IL1

U2 U3 Non operationalSector

+60°

-60°φParameter [1807] =

-45°

U1 IL1

Forward

direction

U3 U2 Non operationalSector



Service Manual


&

IDMT Curve1803

TMS1802

Limit reached 1801

67-TOC Trip1802

&

IDMT Curve1811

TMS1810

Limit reached 1809

off

on„1“

ANSI 67-TOC

67-TOC active

3~

VR_EN

1800

off

on„1“

ANSI 67 N/G/Gs

67 N/G/Gs active1808

3~

67 N/G/Gs Type1815

67 N/G/Gs Direction1814

67 N/G/Gs Pickup1809

67 N/G/Gs Trip1810

67-TOC Direction1806

67-TOC Pickup1801

Voltage Restrain„1“on/off

E P

E

E

E

E

E

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

Reset Char. Th1805

Reset Char.1804P

P

Reset Char. Th1813

Reset Char.1812P

P

Figure 3-59 Logic diagram for the AC directional overcurrent protection



Service Manual


3.23 ANSI 67GS/GD – AC directional ground overcurrent relay

The AC directional ground overcurrent relay is a relay that functions on a desired value of ACground overcurrent flowing in a predetermined direction.

The permissible setting range of this relay depends upon the hardware. Refer to the purchase

information of the hardware to get the appropriate internal current transformers.

Required measuring inputs (pick up) for ANSI67GS/GD protection:

• Ground current input “IG1”, connector X1

• Ground voltage input “UG”, connector X1

ATTENTION: ANSI 67GS is only available if the protection device is equipped with a sensitiveearth current measuring input!

Figure 3-60 ANSI 67GS/GD


1810. AC direction.[67GS/GD] :If the AC dir. ground overcurrent relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1811. - Limit value [Ignd1] :Limit setting of AC directional ground overcurrent; the unit of this limit is mA instead of apercentage. Through this unit very small values can be set (e.g. if a ZCT is in use). If theground current exceeds this limit value event [1811] will be activated.

1812. - Max. limit value (no dir .) :Maximum limit setting of AC directional ground overcurrent; if the ground current exceedsthese limit value events [1811] and [1812] will be activated. These events will in turnactivate the Delay Timer [1813] without checking the directional conditions. To disable themaximum limit supervision set this parameter to zero.

ANSI 67GS/ GD AC di r . gr ound overcur r ent

1810. AC di r ect i on. [ 67GS] : ON1811. - Li mi t val ue [ I gnd1] : 1. 5 mA1812. – Max. l i mi t ( no di r . ) : 4. 0 mA1813. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 1. 0 sec1814. – Vol t . l ow l i mi t [ Vo1] : 10 %1815. – Phase angl e [ +/ - 60] : - 55 deg1816. – del ay pi ckup i n cycl es: 01817. - bl ock pr ot ect i on by : 0 ev.

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 1- 6000. 0 mA or 2. 0- 2999. 9%0. 1- 6000. 0 mA or 2. 0- 2999. 9%0. 01- 99. 99 sec1- 999 %0- 360°1- 99991- 9999

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1813.- Delay time (defini te) :The delay timer for the directional ground overcurrent relay will be activated if the followingcriteria are fulfilled:

• The ground (neutral) current exceeds the limit value of parameter [1811].

• The ground (residual) voltage exceeds the limit value of parameter [1814].

• The phase angle φ is within the operating range given with Parameter [1815] +/-60°.

The timer will also be activated when the ground current exceeds the limit value ofparameter [1812]. If the delay time is passed then event [1813] will be activated as long asthe above criteria are fulfilled. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

1814. - volt. Low limit [Vo1] :Limit setting for ground voltage; if the ground voltage exceeds this limit the protection relaywill be activated. To secure reliable relay operation at extremely low ground voltage, amemory function has been implemented. At sudden loss of ground voltage in a faultsituation, this memory function gives the directional stage an additional 3 seconds time tooperate after loss of voltage (ground voltage below parameter [1814]).

1815. - Phase angle [+/-60°] :Definition of the operating area of the directional ground current relay; the operating area isdefined by this phase angel (Io to Uo) plus 60° degrees in both directions. If the actualphase angle of the ground current in relation to the ground voltage is within the operatingarea then the protection relay will be activated (see also figures 3-61 and 3-62).

Figure 3-61 Operation characteristic when the phase angle φp = +90°

φ p[1815]

I0

U0

non operationalSector

±60

I0 LIMIT [1811]



Service Manual


Figure 3-62 Operation characteristic when the phase angle φp = 0°

1816. - delay pickup in cycles :If the conditions for the directional overcurrent relay are fulfilled then the pickup events[1811] or [1813] will be activated. The delay of the pickup can be cycle wise increased bythis parameter.

1817. - block protection by : AC directional ground overcurrent protection can be completely blocked by any activeevent. For blocking, the number related to this blocking event has to be assigned toparameter [1817]. Blocking is only effective, however, as long as the blocking event isactive.

U0 I0 φ

non operationalSector

I0 LIMIT [1811]

±60



Service Manual


3.24 ANSI 78 – Vector surge/dF/dt supervision relay

Figure 3-63 ANSI 78


1840. Vector surge superv. :To activate the vector surge supervision, set parameter [1840] to “ON”, otherwise to “OFF”.

1841. - limit for phase jump :If a phase jump is higher than the limit set in parameter [1841] is detected than event [1841]will be activated. This event triggers the current flow check. Do not use this event to

activate a relay output, since the active state of this event is too short. If no current increasecheck is needed use event [1842] for activating a relay output. In this case, set parameter[1842] to zero.

1842. - current increase : After a phase jump (event [1841]) is detected, the current flow check will be activated. If thisparameter is set to zero event [1842] will be activated immediately. Otherwise if the currentflow after the following cycle exceeds the limit set in parameter [1841] then event [1842] willbe activated. Use this event number to activate a relay output.

1843. reserved :Not in use

1844. - minimum vol tage :If the feeder voltage exceeds the limit set in parameter [1844] then the vector surgesupervision (parameters [1841] and [1842]) and the dF/dt supervision (parameters [1845]and [1846]) will be activated after a two seconds delay.

ANSI 78 Vector sur ge supervi si on

1840. Vector surge superv. : ON

1841. - l i mi t f or phase j ump : 0 deg1842. - cur r ent i ncrease : 0. 0 %1843. r eserved:1844. – mi ni mum vol t age : 90. 0 %1845. dF/ dt super vi si on dF/ sec: 5. 00 Hz1846. – del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 0. 10 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF

0- 360 deg0. 0- 999. 9 % 0. 0- 99. 9 %0. 00- 99. 99 Hz0. 00- 99. 99 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


1845.dF/dt supervision dF/sec :Limit value for the dF/dt supervision; if the frequency changes per second exceed the limitvalue set in parameter [1845] event [1845] will be activated as long as the frequencychanges are below this limit. The dF/dt supervision can be switched off if this value is set tozero.

Example: The allowed frequency change per 100 ms is 0.5 Hz.That means the frequency change per second is 5 Hz. This limit value shouldbe set with parameter [1845].

=> 0.5 Hz/100 ms = 5 Hz/1 s

1846. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [1845]; if event [1845] is active and this delay time is passed, event[1846] will be activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit of parameter [1845].Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.



Service Manual


3.25 ANSI 78 S Out -of-step tripping

Figure 3-64 ANSI 78 S


1850. Out-of-step tripping :To activate the Out-of-step tripping supervision, set parameter [1850] to “ON”, otherwise to“OFF”.

1851. - limit reverse power :Low limit setting of Out-of-step tripping supervision; if the active power of the generator

exceeds this limit value the out-of-step supervision will be activated. This means thesupervision period timer will be started if it has not already been activated.

1852. reserved :Reserved parameter

1853. - limit high act. power :High limit setting of out-of-step tripping supervision; if the supervision period timer isrunning (see parameter [1851]) and the active power of the generator exceeds this limit thepositive amplitude of the out-of-step tripping supervision will be registered. An out-of-stepperiod is complete if during the supervision time (parameter [1857]) the high limit and thelow limit (parameters [1851] and [1853]) are detected.

1854. reserved :Reserved parameter

1855. - number of periods :Maximum number of periods for out-of-step tripping; if the count of out-of-step periodsreaches this limit then the trip condition has been reached and event [1855] will beactivated. This event remains active as long as during the next supervision period no out-of-step conditions are measured. Please use this parameter number for the alarm or outputcontroller.

1856. reserved :

Reserved parameter

ANSI 78 S Out of st ep t r i ppi ng

1850. Out of st ep t r i ppi ng : ON

1851. – l i mi t r ever se power : 5. 0 %1852. - r eser ved:1853. – l i mi t hi gh act . power : 75. 0 %1854. – r eserved:1855. – number of per i ods : 41856. – r eserved:1857. –hol di ng t i me of pi ckup: 40. 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF

0. 0- 99. 9 % 0. 0- 199. 9% 0- 100

0. 1- 999. 9 sec

BACKEXI T



Service Manual


1857. -holding time of pickup :Maximum supervision time for an out-of-step period; if the supervision timer has run downwithout detecting another out-of-step condition, the period counter will be set to zero.

0%

„limit reverse power“ P[1851] = -10%

100%

t

Active power P

„limit high act. power“ P[1853] = 60%

t

„holding time of pickup“ P[1857] = 30s

t1

2

3

4„number of periods“ P[1855] =

t

t

„ANSI 78S pickup“ E[1853]

„ANSI 78S trip“ E[1855]

P>0

P<0: reverse power!

0

Figure 3-65 Example for ANSI 78 S out-of-step tripp ing

Explanation of the diagram:

1. The active power of the generator exceeds the “limit reverse power ” P[1851] and so thetimer for out-of-step period supervision “holding time of pickup” P[1857] has been started.

2. The active power of the generator exceeds the “limit high act. power ” P[1853]. This isanother criterion for the out-of-step period.

3. The active power of the generator exceeds the “limit reverse power ” P[1851] again. Theout-of-step condition has been reached, since a whole power swing period has beengained before the “holding time of pickup” P[1857] has run down. The out-of-step counter“number of periods “ P[1855] will be increased by one, and event “ ANSI 78S pickup”E[1853] becomes active. Subsequently, the next power swing period will be supervised.



Service Manual


4. The number of out-of-step periods has reached the maximum “number of periods”P[1855]), thus event “ ANSI 78S trip” E[1855] will be activated.

5. If timer for out-of-step period supervision runs down without detecting another out-of-stepperiod, the events “ ANSI 78S pickup” E[1853] and “ ANSI 78S trip” E[1855] will bedeactivated. The out-of-step counter will be reset.

NOTE: The timer for out-of-step period supervision will be activated, only if the active powerfalls below the “limit reverse power “ P[1851].



Service Manual


3.26 ANSI 79 – AC reclosing relay

AC reclosing relay is a relay that controls the automatic reclosing and locking out of an AC circuitbreaker.From experience, the majority of faults associated with overhead distribution feeders aretemporary in nature. Therefore, to maximize service availability, it is desirable to employ a systemthat will close the circuit breaker shortly after it is tripped. This is accomplished in the SYMAP® viathe automatic reclosing system. When the automatic reclosing system is used if the fault still existsafter the circuit breaker has been reclosed, then the protective elements will re-trip the circuitbreaker. Depending on the number of reclosing attempts programmed for the automatic reclosingsystem (up to nine are possible), the circuit breaker will either be reclosed again, or it will remainopen. The automatic reclosing function is typically utilized only in situations in which theoccurrence of temporary faults is anticipated. Therefore, the automatic reclosing system is notapplied when the SYMAP® is used to protect generators, motors, transformers, and cables. Theautomatic reclosing function can also be initiated by an external protection relay. For thisapplication, an output contact from the tripping relay must be wired to a binary input of the

SYMAP

®

. It is also possible to allow the SYMAP

®

to work in conjunction with an external reclosingdevice.

Initiation of the automatic reclosing function can be caused by internal protective functions orexternally using a binary input. Each of the following elements may initiate the automatic reclosingfunction:

ANSI 50-1, 50-2, 50-r, 51, 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC

The automatic reclosing system can be programmed so that any of the elements above caninitiate, not initiate, or block reclosing. If an element initiates reclosing the appropriate reclosingprogram is executed.

Figure 3-66 ANSI 79

ANSI 79 AC r ecl osi ng r el ay1900. AC r ecl osi ng r el ay : ON1901. - Recl ai m t i me : 20. 0 sec1902. - Recl osi ng t r i al s : 31903. - 1. Recl osi ng t i me : 250 ms1904. - 2. Recl osi ng t i me : 3. 0 sec1905. - 3. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec1906. - 4. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec1907. - 5. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec1908. - 6. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec1909. - 7. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec

1910. - 8. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec1911. - 9. Recl osi ng t i me : 0. 0 sec1912. – Bl ocki ng vi a event : 01913. - I ni t i at e vi a event : 01914. – CB r ecl ose event1915. –Recl ose event durat i on: 100 ms1916. –Recl ose success event1917. –Recl ose f ai l event

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 1- 999. 9 sec0- 9990- 9999 ms0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 sec

0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 999. 9 secEvent no.Event no.

0- 9999 ms



Service Manual



1900. AC reclosing relay :If the AC reclosing relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

1901. - Reclaim time :

The reclaim time is the setting of the maximum time of the whole reclosure attempt.

1902. - Reclosing trials :Setting of the maximum numbers of reclosures shots

1903. - 1. Reclosing time :Setting of the first reclosing time

1904. - 2. Reclosing time :Setting of the second reclosing time

1905. - 3. Reclosing time :

Setting of the third reclosing time

1906. - 4. Reclosing time :Setting of the forth reclosing time

1907. - 5. Reclosing time :Setting of the fifth reclosing time

1908. - 6. Reclosing time :Setting of the sixth reclosing time

1909. - 7. Reclosing time :

Setting of the seventh reclosing time

1910. - 8. Reclosing time :Setting of the eighth reclosing time

1911. - 9. Reclosing time :Setting of the ninth reclosing time

1912. - Blocking via event :The breaker reclosure command can be blocked by entering the belonging event number. All other functions of ANSI 79 are active.

1913. - Init iate via event : A reclosure shot can be initiated by entering the selected event number. That is onlypossible when the reclose time is active only.

1914. - CB reclose event . This event will drive the breaker over a binary output.

1915. - Reclose event duration :The duration is responsible for the length of pulse time of the reclosure shot.

1916. - Reclose success event .

1917. - Reclose fail event.





Service Manual


3.27 ANSI 81 – Frequency relay

Frequency relay is a relay that responds to the frequency of an electrical quantity and operateswhen the frequency or rate of change of frequency exceeds or is less than a predetermined value.The frequency is measured from the feeder voltage.The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system. Ifthe frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as loadshedding or separating a generator from the system. A decrease in system frequency occurs whenthe system experiences an increase in the real power demand or when a malfunction occurs with agenerator governor or automatic generation control (AGC) system. An increase in systemfrequency occurs when large blocks of load are removed from the system or again when amalfunction occurs with a generator governor or AGC system. Through the use of filters andrepeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is free from harmonic influences and veryaccurate.Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. Two given frequency element can beset to pickup for overfrequency and two for underfrequency conditions. Each element can beindependently set and utilized to perform different functions within the system.

The frequency can be determined as long as the positive sequence voltages are present and ofsufficient magnitude. If the measurement voltage drops below a settable value (parameter [2012])then frequency protection is blocked. For elements used in an underfrequency protection mode, assoon as the frequency of the measured voltage decreases below the setting, the element picks upand remains picked up until the system frequency increases above the setting. For elements usedin an overfrequency protection mode, as soon as the frequency of the measured voltage increasesabove the setting, the element picks up and remains picked up until the frequency decreasesbelow the setting.

Figure 3-69 ANSI 81

ANSI 81 Frequency rel ay

2000. Frequency r el ay : OFF

2001. Over f r eq. 1. st ep l i mi t : 102. 0 %2002. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 4. 0 sec2003. r eserved:2004. Over f r eq. 2. st ep l i mi t : 104. 0 %2005. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec2006. r eserved:2007. Under f r eq. 1. st ep l i mi t : 98. 0 %2008. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 4. 0 sec2009. r eserved:2010. Under f r eq. 2. st ep l i mi t : 86. 0 %2011. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec2012. Under vol t age bl ocki ng : 0. 0 %

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF/ CB ON

100. 0- 199. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

100. 0- 199, 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

0. 1- 99. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec

0. 1- 99. 9 %0. 1- 999. 9 sec0. 1- 99. 9 %



Service Manual



2000. Frequency relay :This parameter activates the frequency supervision, whereby:


• “ON”: activates and• “CB ON”: activates the underfrequency supervision only if the circuit breaker is

switched on.

2001.Overfreq. 1.step limit :Limit setting of definite overfrequency

2002. - Delay time (defnite) :Time delay of event [2001]; use this event to activate an output.

2003. reserved :

2004. Overfreq. 2.step limit :Limit setting of definite overfrequency


2006. reserved :

2007. Underfreq. 1.step limit :Limit setting of definite underfrequency

2008. - Delay time (defnite) :

Time delay of event [2007]; use this event to activate an output.

2009. reserved :

2010. Underfreq. 2.step limit :Limit setting of definite underfrequency


2012. Undervoltage blocking :This parameter depends on the device type.

Device type BC or X:When the feeder voltage is lower than this setting the underfrequency protection function isdisabled.

Device type BCG or XG:This parameter is not active since the underfrequency relay works when the main breakeris on, otherwise it is blocked.



Service Manual


Figure 3-70 Logic diagram for the frequency protection

Limit reached

201

200

Limit reached

8 - 3

Delay 200

8 - 3 Trip 200

&

8 - 4

Delay 201

0 T | |

0 T | | 201

8 - 4 Trip

Limit reached

200

200

Limit reached

8

- 1

Delay 200

8 - 1 Trip 200

8 - 2

Delay 200

0 T | |

0 T | | 200

8 - 2 Trip

f << 3 ~

8 - 4 Pickup 201

f < 3 ~

8 - 3

Pickup 200

f >> 3 ~

8 - 2

Pickup 200

f > 3 ~

8

-

1

Pickup

200

&

&

&

S 1 Q R

Startup U > 3 ~

Setting 2012 ≥1 8

active 200

Reset

off on „1“

ANSI 81

E

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E



Service Manual


3.28 ANSI 81 B – BUS frequency relay

There are two independent frequency relays for the BUS1 and BUS2 measure inputs available.

Figure 3-71 ANSI 81 B-1

Figure 3-72 ANSI 81 B-2


The parameters for the BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, so in thefollowing only the BUS1 parameters are described:

2020. BUS1 frequency relay :The enable switch for the frequency relay

2021. - Overfrequency 1.limit :First limit of the set point for overfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarmpre-warning.

2022. - delay (defini te) :Time delay of event [2021]; use the event [2022] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

ANSI 81B Bus f r equency r el ay↑

2032. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 7. 0 sec2033. - Over f r equency 2. l i mi t : 105. 0 %2034. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 3. 0 sec

2035. - Under f r equency 1. l i mi t : 99. 0 %2036. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 9. 0 sec2037. - Under f r equency 2. l i mi t : 98. 0 %2038. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 1. 5 sec2039. - Mi ni mum st ar t vol t age : 25. 0 %

Set t i ng r ange:

0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec

0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %

BACK EXI T

ANSI 81B Bus f r equency r el ay

2020. BUS1 f r equency rel ay : ON2021. - Over f r equency 1. l i mi t : 102. 0 %2022. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 8. 0 sec2023. - Over f r equency 2. l i mi t : 108. 0 %2024. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 2. 0 sec2025. - Under f r equency 1. l i mi t : 98. 0 %2026. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 4. 0 sec2027. - Under f r equency 2. l i mi t : 97. 0 %2028. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 1. 0 sec2029. - Mi ni mum st ar t vol t age : 30. 0 %2030. BUS2 f r equency r el ay : ON2031. - Over f r equency 1. l i mi t : 102. 0 % ↓

BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec0. 0- 999. 9 %ON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %



Service Manual


2023.- Overfrequency 2.limit :Second limit of the set point for overfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarmprewarning.

2024. - delay (defnite) :Time delay of event [2023]; use the event [2024] to activate a binary output and an alarm.

2025. - Underfrequency 1.limit :First limit of the set point for underfrequency; this event number can be used for an alarmprewarning.


2027. - Underfrequency 2.limit :Second limit of the set point for underfrequency; this event number can be used for analarm prewarning.


2029. - Minimum startvol tage . If the startvoltage is reached by all 3 phases the frequency relay remains always active untilpower on reset.



Service Manual


3.29 ANSI 86 – Lockout relay

Lockout relay is a reset auxiliary relay that is operated manually upon the occurrence of abnormalconditions to maintain associated equipment or devices inoperative until it is reset.

Figure 3-73 ANSI 86


2090. Operate as Flip-Flop? :If the lockout relay should be activated set it to “ON”. The lockout function of the binaryoutput –X2.1/16, 17 (event [0702]) is active.This relay output is working as a normal binary output in case the failure lockout relay isswitched off. Otherwise, it can be used as S/R-flip-flop (see figure 3-70).

2091. - reset by event :This event initiates a reset of the failure lockout relay output in case the release of theoutput is no longer active. This function is comparable with a SR-Register.

2092. lockout set (stored) :

Figure 3-74 Logic diagram for the lockout relay function

ANSI 86 Lockout r el ay

2090. Oper at e as Fl i p- Fl op?: NO2091. - r eset by event : 99992092. – l ockout set ( st or ed)

Set t i ng r ange:

NO/ YES0- 9999

BACK EXI T

≥1

& SR

[0703]

[0702]

Parameter[2090]

1. Event2. Event3. Event4. Event5. Event6. Event

Parameter [2091]

Binary Output Event [0702]



Service Manual


3.30 ANSI 87 – Dif ferential protect ion relay

Differential protection relay is a relay that functions on a percentage or phase angle or otherquantitative difference of two currents or of some other electrical quantities.

Figure 3-75 ANSI 87


2100. Diff . protective relay :This parameter activates the differential protection, whereby:


• “ON”: activates and

• “CB ON”: activates the differential protection only when the circuit breaker has beenswitched on.

2101. - Diff. Limit [xxxx]A :Limit setting of definite differential protection; if the actual measured current differenceexceeds this limit event [2101] will be activated.


Time delay of event [2101]; if event [2101] has been activated and the delay time is passedthen event [2102] will remain activated as long as the actual value falls below the limit ofparameter [2101]. Please use this parameter for the alarm or output controller.

2103. - Angle compensation :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with transformer differential protection!

In case of transformer application, the angle compensation can be activated. Table 3-1shows the possible settings and the corresponding phase shifts (Iprim/Isec) of the differenttransformer types.

ANSI 87 Di f f er ent i al pr ot ect i on

2100. Di f f . pr ot ecti ve rel ay : OFF2101. – Di f f . l i mi t [ 200] A : 20. 0 %2102. - Del ay t i me ( def i ni t e) : 0. 15 sec2103. – Angl e compensat i on : Dy12104. - r eser ved :2105. – power f l ow f or 87LD : f orward2106. – mi n. vol t age f or 87LD : 0. 0 %2107. – I nr ush bl ocki ng : ON2108. – Bi as l i mi t : 10. 0 %2109. – Zero compensat i on : OFF2110. – del ay pi ckup i n cycl es: 12111. - bl ock pr ot ect i on by : 0 ev.2112. - r eser ved :

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF2. 0- 99. 9 %0. 05- 999. 99 secNone, Dy1, Dy5, Dy7, Dy11, Yd1… f or war d/ r ever se0. 0- 99. 9 % ON/ OFF0. 1- 999. 9 %ON/ OFF0- 99990- 9999

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


Table 3-1 Vector group matching

Transformertype

Phase shiftIprim to Isec (deg)

Transformertype

Phase shiftIprim to Isec (deg)

NONE 0Dy1 30 Dd0 0Dy5 150 Dd2 60

Dy7 210 Dd4 120Dy11 330 Dd6 180Yd1 30 Dd8 240Yd5 150 Dd10 300Yd7 210 Yy0 0Yd11 330 Yy6 180

Dy11d0y11 : Iprim to Isec1 :330° ; Isec1 = Id1 (X1.7-12) LCD: IS1 d0 : Iprim to Isec2 : 0° ; Isec2 = Id2 (X1.13-16) LCD: IS2

Yy6d5y6 : Iprim to Isec1 : 180° ; Isec1 = Id2 (X1.13-16) LCD: IS2 d5 : Iprim to Isec2 : 150° ; Isec2 = Id1 (X1.7-12) LCD: IS1

Yy0d1Y0 : Iprim to Isec1 : 0° ; Isec1 = Id2 (X1.13-16) LCD: IS2 d1 : Iprim to Isec2 : 30° ; Isec2 = Id1 (X1.7-12) LCD: IS1

2104. reserved :

2105.- power flow for 87LD :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with line differential protection!

Definition of the power flow; the direction of the power flow will be transferred via thecommunication line. The status of the power flow is used to compare the RMS-values of thefeeder phase currents with the received currents values (RMS) of the partner device. Thisfunction is activated when parameter [2106] is unequal to zero.

2106. - min. vol tage for 87LD :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with line differential protection!

The operation of the line differential protection is influenced in the following ways:

• “0%”: The line differential protection is always active. Only the RMS-values ofboth devices are compared.

• “1%” – “99%”: The line differential protection function is blocked when a minimum ofone feeder voltage is zero or under the limit value. If the feeder voltageis higher than this limit the protection function will be released, thepower flow status of each phase will be calculated and transferred tothe partner device.

2107. - Inrush blocking :

The delay time of parameter [2102] can be extended if inrush conditions referring to ANSI95i settings are detected. The condition of the inrush can be set within the parameter group“ANSI 95i inrush blocking”.

2108. - Bias limit :If the actual measured feeder current exceeds the nominal value a spread factor will becalculated, increasing the limit of parameter [2101]. Figure 3-76 shows the formula and thecharacteristic of the bias factor:



Service Manual


0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

d i f f e r e n t i a l p r o t e c t i o n l i m i t i n [ % ] o f I n

I/In

ANSI 87 [bias fact or ]

bias = 50,0%

bias = 40,0%

bias = 10,0%

bias = 20,0%

bias = 30,0%

setpoint diff.limit ;here: [2101] =

Calculation o f actual dif ferential protection limit wit h biasfactor:

dif f.lim it = parameter [2101] +parameter [2101] * p arameter [2108] * (I/In -1)

whereby:parameter [2101]: d iff .limit [ANSI 87]parameter [2108]: b ias factor (in percent)

Figure 3-76 Formula and characteristic of the bias factor

2109. - Zero compensation :

NOTE: Only in use for devices with transformer differential protection!

This parameter activates the zero compensation. In case of start-connection of transformer(e.g. Dyn 11 with connected neutral line) the y-connected side will be zero compensated.Therefore the sum of all momentary phase current values will be calculated. This neutralcurrent will be used to reduce the measured current difference of the transformer.

2110. - delay pickup in cycles :If the actual measured difference current is higher then the limit setting of definitedifferential protection (parameter [2101]) the pickup of this protection relay will be activated.The delay of the pickup can be cycle wise (at fn = 50 Hz: 20 ms, at fn=60 Hz: 16,7 ms)increased by this parameter.

Example: Rated frequency = 50 Hz.Parameter [2110] = 3=> Pickup delay time: 3 × 20 ms = 60 ms.

2111. - block protection by :Differential protection can be completely blocked by any active event. For blocking, thenumber related to this blocking event has to be assigned to parameter [2111]. Blocking isonly effective, however, as long as the blocking event is active.

2112. - reserved :



Service Manual


Figure 3-77 shows a CT-connection example for the ANSI 87 protection relay.

Figure 3-77 CT-connection for ANSI 87

I G1

13

14

6

5 4 3 2 1 I 1

I 2

I 3

CT

P1 P2

P1

P2 P1

P2

G/M3~

11

10

9

8I D1

I D2

I D312

CT

P2 P1

P2 P1 P2

7

CT-connection

X1 = Type 3 CMA199 – 3/13

AVR 15

Rotor insulation X 1

U ISO

SYMAP®-BC_connection_ANSI 87N



Service Manual


3.31 ANSI 87LD – L ine Differential Protection

The line differential protection supervises a line section through current differential measurement.Therefore 2 devices on both line ends are necessary. Both devices are measuring the 3 phase linecurrent. Over fibre optic, or copper pilot wire, the measuring values will be transmitted, and thedifference values calculated. In the case of over limits, both circuit breakers on the cable end willbe tripped.

Connection example for fibre optic

with:I A: Line current measured in station AIB: Line current measured in station BID: Differential current I A- IBLWL: Fiber optic; Communication interface between A and B

Figure 3-78 Line Differential Protection – fibre optic connection

Transfer line

LWL (max.: 40 km)

Mode*Max.Distance

Line/Core

Singlemode 40 km 9/125 µmMultimode 2,5 km 62,5/125 µm

Max. distance depends on patch numbers.

Protection area

Station A Station B

Device A Device B

I A IB

k l k l



Service Manual


Connection example for copper connection

with:I A: Line current measured in station AIB: Line current measured in station BID: Differential current I A- IBLD-copper: Copper line; communication interface between Device A and B

Figure 3-79 Line Differential Protection – copper pilot wiring

Table 3-2 LD copper connection

Mode Min.Baud rate Type /line cross section*Max. Distance Load resistance

Multi mode 125KBd/s CopperNym line/1,5mm² 400m

RT=120Ω Twisted and blinded line 0,5mm² 700m

* the longer the distance, the smaller the baud rate

Measuring methodBoth devices measure the three phase current and voltage on both line ends. Via this dates, thedevices calculate value and direction of each phase current. This data’s will be transmitted over

the fibre optics or copper wire to the other side. After accurate transmission the differential currentswill be calculated. For the case of faulty communication the protection will be immediately blocked.

Communication [system parameter/03 communication]Both, fibre optic and copper connection will be activated by communication parameter (serial port2):


0322. SERIAL PORT (ASC2) :

Engaging of the serial port for the fibre optic, and the copper connection.

Transfer line

Station A Station B

Protection device A Protection device B

LD-cooper l ine (max.: 700m)

29a

28a

29

28

29a

28a

29

28

I A IB

Protection area

120Ω 120Ω



Service Manual


0323. -address :Communication address; within the fibre optic and the copper connection the decive shouldhave address numbers 1 and 2.

0324. -baud rate :Bit rate; the baud rate of the fibre optic communication needs to be adjusted on min. 89300

Baud (bit/sec), and for the copper communication min. 125000 Baud (bit/sec). A higher bitrate improves the result of the differential current measurement, due to the fact, that therelative time delay for the protocol exchange will be limited. This parameter needs to besimilar for both devices.

After adjusting the communication parameter, both devices will establish a connection. Thereforethe device with the No.1 will send a protocol with the measurement values to device 2 all 16-20ms. After successful receive of the protocol, the device 2 will answer with an own protocol. The linedifferential protection will be blocked, if within 20ms no protocol will be received. The event [0324]will be activated, if more than 10 protocols will be lost consecutively. After 2 min. communicationerror, the system alarm „3041. ACC2 bus off“ will be activated. .

Calibration parameterVia the calibration parameter hardware components will be activated. The following calibratingparameters are important for the line differential protection.


0067. Diff . Current input : Activation of the differential protection; over engaging „LINE DIFF“ the operating system willbe prepared in that way, that the currents for the differential calculation will be transmittedover the fibre optic, or copper connection.

0060. Current direction :Definition of the current direction; for current measuring in one similar direction (see k and ldesignation in figure 1.1), the direction of both devices needs to be adjusted on „forward“.If both devices are measuring into the protection zone, one device needs to be adjusted on„forward“, the other one on „reverse“.

Protection parameterFor line differential protection the parameter „ANSI 87 Differential protection“ needs to be chosen.The following parameters are available.


2100. Diff . Protect ion relay :Protection function activate/ deactivate; for activation of the line differential protection, putthe parameter „ON“.

2101. - Diff. limit [ 80]A :Limit for differential protection. If the diff. current exceeds this limit, the differentialprotection will be started and event no. [2101] activated; (difference of the instantaneouscurrent values from device A and B inclusive the power flow). For secure function of thislimit min. 60ms are necessary.

2102. - Delay time (defini te) :Delay time; exceeding of this time period activate the event [2102]. This event no. shouldbe used for function outputs or alarms.



Service Manual


2103. - 2104.These parameters are not used.

2105. - power flow for 87LD :Definition of the power flow; this parameter is similar to the calibration parameter [0060],however this parameter refers just on the direction of the differential protection. All further

directional protection functions will be not affected.

2106. - min. vol tage for 87LD :Min. line voltage for enabling the line differential protection; all 3 line voltage needs to beabove this limit, for activation of the line differential protection.

2106. - Inrush blocking :Inrush blocking; if an „inrush“ is detected“, the inrush blocking from parameter [2102] couldbe used. Therefore the relays „ANSI 95i inrush blocking „ needs to be activated. Allnecessary criteria for the detection of an inrush could be adjusted in this parameter group,in order to extend the time limits.

2107. - Bias limit : Adjustment of the stabilizaation current; if the line current is above the nominal current,(Parameter [0200]), the Parameter [2101] enables to extend the value depending thecurrent value. See „bias limit“ table service manual, chapter 1.2.28.

2108. - Zero compensation :This parameter is not used.





Service Manual


NOTE: The transformer winding ratio and transformer CT current on the secondary side will betaken from ANSI 87 parameters [2104] and [2105].

Restri cted earth fault for Transformer applicationParameter [2120] = “ON”

Figure 3-81 Restric ted earth fault for Transformer application

CTSec

X 1

IG11314

65

43

21

I1

I2

I3

CTPrim

P1

P2

P1

P2

P1 P2

11

109

87

ID1

ID2

ID312

P1

P2

P1

P2

P1

P2

X 1

N L1 L2 L3

IG2 16

15

P2

P1

X1 = Type 5 CMA199-4/14

CT – connection

Calculation for thefault current:I87N= ID1+ID2+ID3 – IG2



Service Manual


Restri cted earth fault for Generator/Motor applicationParameter [2120] = “ON PRIMARY”

Figure 3-82 Restric ted earth fault for Generator/Motor application

X 1

IG1

13

14

6

54321 I1

I2

I3

CTPrim

P1

P2 P1

P2 P1

P2

CTgnd P2

P1

Calculation for the faultcurrent:I87N= I1+I2+I3 – IG1

CT - Connection





Service Manual



2229. - Undervol tage limit :Setting of the undervoltage alarm limit for the nominal aux.voltage of the aux. power circuit.

2230. - Delay time (defini te) :Time delay of event [2232]. Use this event to activate an output.

Figures 3-84 and 3-85 show the DC application for breaker coil supervision.

Figure 3-84 DC application – Working principle to connect the SYMAP® to DC breaker coils

Free-wheeling diode

+

-

Binary outputof SYMAP

®

For DC use of contacts fromSYMAP

®, the relay coils must have

a free-wheeling diode in parallel.



Service Manual


Figure 3-85 DC-application – Connect ion of SYMAP®for DC breaker coil supervision

Figures 3-86 show the AC application for breaker coil supervision.

Figure 3-86 AC-App licat ion – Connect ion o f SYMAP®for AC breaker coil supervision

Shunt 1:Terminals 18 and 19 for “Trip”

~ Control voltage: 24 – 250 V AC

SYMAP

OFF

19

20

21

ON

Resistor:R = 15 x ROFF coil

Resistor:

R = 15 x RON coil

~

18

Shunt 1:Terminals 18 and 19 for “Trip”

Free-wheeling diodes

+ Control voltage: 24 – 250 V DC

SYMAP

OFF

19

20

21

ON

Resistor:R = 15 x ROFF coil

Resistor:R = 15 x RON coil

-

18



Service Manual


Figures 3-87 and 3-88 show the logical diagrams for shunt trip supervision and auxiliary power(control voltage) supervision.

Figure 3-87 Logic diagram for the shunt trip supervision

2232 Limit reached

&

94-3 U< Delay2233

0 T| |

2233 94-3 U< Trip

U <

94-3 Undervoltage Pickup2232

2230 Limit reached

&

94-3 U> Delay2231

0 T| |

2231 94-3 U> Trip

U >

off

on„1“ 2228 94-3 active

ANSI 94-3Aux. Power

94-3 Overvoltage Pickup2230

Uaux nominal input2229

PE

E

E

E

E

P

P

P

P

Figure 3-88 Logic diagram for the aux. power supervision

2226 Limit reached

&

94-2 Delay2227

0 T| |

2227 94-4 Tr ip

U <

94-2 Pickup2226

off

on„1“ 2224 94-2 active

ANSI 94-2Shunt Trip #2

2222 Limit reached

&

94-1 Delay2223

0 T| |

2223 94-1 Tr ip

U <

94-1 Pickup2222

Nom. Aux. Voltage2221

off

on„1“ 2220 94-1 active

ANSI 94-1Shunt Trip #1

Nom. Aux. Voltage2225

P

E

PP

P

P

P E

E

E

E

E

CB closed

CB open



Service Manual


3.34 ANSI 95 i – Inrush blocking relay

When the SYMAP® is installed to protect a power transformer, large magnetizing inrush currentswill flow when the transformer is energized. These inrush currents may be several times thenominal transformer current and depending on the transformer size and design, may last fromseveral milliseconds to several seconds. Although pickup of the relay elements is based only on the fundamental harmonic component ofthe measured currents, false device pickup due to inrush is still a potential problem since,depending on the transformer size and design, the fundamental harmonic comprises a largecomponent of the inrush current.

The SYMAP® features an integrated inrush restraint function that may be utilized when the deviceis installed at or near a transformer. It supervises the “normal” tripping of all directional and non-directional overcurrent relay elements with the exception of the ANSI 67 and ANSI 67GS/GD relayelements. For example, when a transformer is energized the current levels may exceed the normalpickup of the overcurrent elements set in the device. If inrush conditions are identified (the 2ndharmonic content of current exceeds the value of setting at parameter [2302]) special inrush

messages are created within the device that will block tripping of the overcurrent elements.

Note that only the tripping elements are affected by harmonic inrush detection, the pickup valuesand corresponding timers continue to operate normally. Inrush current contains a relatively largesecond harmonic component which is nearly absent during a short-circuit fault. Inrush currentdetection, therefore, is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic component present duringinrush conditions. For frequency analysis, digital filters are used to conduct a Fourier analysis of allthree phase currents and the ground current. As soon as the second harmonic component of thecurrent flowing in a specific phase or ground relay element exceeds a set value, tripping is blockedfor that element (does not apply ANSI 67, and ANSI 67GS/GD elements). Since quantitativeanalysis of the harmonic components of the current flowing through a specific relay element cannotbe completed until a full cycle of inrush current has been measured, inrush restraint blocking and

the associated inrush detection message is automatically delayed by one cycle. However, it isimportant to note that the tripping time delays associated with the relay elements are startedimmediately after pickup of the relay element, even if the inrush conditions are detected. If inrushblocking drops out during the time delay tripping will occur when the time delay of the elementelapses. If inrush blocking drops out after the time delay has elapsed tripping will occurimmediately. Therefore, utilization of the inrush restraint feature will not result in any additionaltripping delays. If a relay element drops out during inrush blocking the associated time delay willreset.

Figure 3-89 ANSI 95 i

ANSI 95i I nr ush bl ocki ng r el ay

2300. I nr ush bl ocki ng r el ay : OFF2301. - l i mi t of DC- por t i on : 10. 0 %2302. – 2. harmoni c cont ent : 20 %2303. – Te ext ensi on t i me : 100 ms2304. – Tmax bl ocki ng t i me : 0. 20 sec2305. – I max bl ocki ng i nr ush : 1600 %

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF1. 0- 99. 9 %1- 99 %30- 9999 ms0. 03- 99. 99 sec1- 2999 %

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



2300. Inrush blocking relay :If the inrush blocking relay should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

2301. - limit of DC-port ion :

Limit setting of DC-portion of the measured current value

2302. - 2. harmonic content :Limit setting of 2nd. harmonic content of the measured current value

2303. - Te extension time :Measuring interval for inrush check

2304. - Tmax blocking time :Maximum inrush blocking time

2305. - Imax blocking inrush :

If the measured current exceeds this limit the inrush blocking function will be switched off.



Service Manual


3.35 ANSI FF – Fuse failure (vol tages)

There are three independent fuse failure relays for the generator, BUS1 and BUS2 voltagemeasure inputs available. The fuse failure protection monitors the displacement voltage Uo andthe phase voltages U1, U2 and U3. For every relay three independent limits are available. Theuser can define own combinations of these three limits. Limits which are not used should be set tozero. The delay will only start to run if all enabled limits are reached.

NOTE: The Fuse failure relays should not be used for ungrounded systems.

Figure 3-90 ANSI FF


The parameters for the generator, BUS1 and BUS2 relay differs only in the parameter numbers, soin the following only the generator parameters are described.

2310. GENERATOR fuse fai lure :The enable switch for this Fuse failure relay

2311. - Uo limit :This limit will be supervised if the set value is unequal zero. The displacement voltage iscalculated from the phase voltages U1, U2 and U3. The percentage is calculated fromparameter P[0201].

Example:

P [2311] (22.5%) * P [0201] (400V) / √3 = 51.9 V

Event [2311] is activated if the displacement voltage reaches this limit and all other enabledlimits are reached.

FF Fuse f ai l ur e ( vol t ages)

2310. GENERATOR f use f ai l ure : ON2311. – Uo l i mi t : 22. 5 %2312. – l ow vol t age l i mi t : 8. 3 %2313. – hi gh vol t age l i mi t : 95. 6 %2314. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 3. 0 sec

2320. BUS 1 f use f ai l ur e : OFF2321. – Uo l i mi t : 30. 0 %2322. – l ow vol t age l i mi t : 12. 0 %2323. – hi gh vol t age l i mi t : 97. 0 %2324. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 8. 0 sec2330. BUS 2 f use f ai l ur e : OFF2331. – Uo l i mi t : 35. 0 %2332. – l ow vol t age l i mi t : 20. 0 %2333. – hi gh vol t age l i mi t : 98. 0 %2334. - del ay ( def i ni t e) : 7. 5 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

ON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec

ON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secON/ OFF0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec

BACK EXI T



Service Manual


2312. - low voltage limit :This limit will be supervised if the set value is unequal zero. The percentage is calculatedfrom parameter P[0201].

Example:

P [2312](8.3%) * P [0201](400V) / √3 = 19.1 V

Event [2312] is activated if one of the three phase voltages U1, U2 or U3 reaches this limitand all other enabled limits are reached.

2313. - high voltage limit :This limit will be supervised if the set value is unequal zero. The percentage is calculatedfrom parameter P[0201].

Example:

P [2313](95.6%) * P [0201](400V) / √3 = 220.7 V

Event [2313] is activated if one of the three phase voltages U1, U2 or U3 reaches this limit

and all other enabled limits are reached.

2314. - delay (defini te) :Use this event to activate a binary output and an alarm.This event is active if a combination of the three limits is logically true and the delay ispassed. The enabled limits are logically AND associated. In the table 3-3 all seven possiblecombinations of enabled limits are listed:

Table 3-3 Combinations of enabled limits

Uo limit Low limit High limit

1 X2 X

3 X4 X X5 X X6 X X7 X X X



Service Manual


3.36 Auxi li ary limi ts

With these 8 auxiliary limits the user can define further events for his own applications. The timedelays of these limits are not as exact as the delay time of the ANSI devices. All these limits will bechecked two times per second, so they have an accuracy of 500 ms.

Figure 3-91 Auxi liary l imits-1

Figure 3-92 Auxi liary l imits-2


2340. CURRENT (avg) - 1. limit :The enable switch for this auxiliary limit:

• “OFF”: This limit is disabled.

• “LOW”: The limit is reached if the actual value falls below the limit of parameter

[2341]• “HIGH”: The limit is reached if the actual value is higher than the limit of parameter

[2341]

AUXI LI ARY LI MI TS↑

2352. POWER( sum) - 1. l i mi t : OFF

2353. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2354. - del ay: 0. 0 sec2355. - 2. l i mi t : OFF2356. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2357. - del ay: 0. 0 sec2358. FREQUENCY - 1. l i mi t : OFF2359. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2360. - del ay: 0. 0 sec2361. - 2. l i mi t : OFF2362. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2363. - del ay: 0. 0 sec

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ LOW/ HI GH/ REV- H/ CAP- H/ I ND- H

0. 0 … 999. 9 %0. 0 … 999. 9 secOFF| LOW| HI GH| REV- H| CAP- H| I ND- H 0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secOFF/ LOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secOFF/ LOW/ HI GH0. 0/ 999. 9 %0. 0/ 999. 9 sec

BACK EXI T

AUXI LI ARY LI MI TS

2340. CURRENT(avg) - 1. l i mi t : OFF2341. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2342. - del ay: 0. 0 sec2343. - 2. l i mi t : OFF2344. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2345. - del ay: 0. 0 sec2346. VOLTAGE( avg) - 1. l i mi t : OFF2347. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2348. - del ay: 0. 0 sec2349. - 2. l i mi t : OFF2350. - l i mi t : 0. 0 %2351. - del ay: 0. 0 sec

↓ BACK EXI T

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ LOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secOFF/ LOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secOFF/ LOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 secOFF/ LOW/ HI GH0. 0- 999. 9 %0. 0- 999. 9 sec



Service Manual


2341. - limit :The percentage is calculated from parameter [0200]. Event [2341] is activated if theaverage current reaches this limit.

2342. - delay :This event is active if the limit is reached and the delay is passed.

2343. - 2. limit :to

2345. - delay :See the 1. Current limit

2346. VOLTAGE (avg) - 1. limi t :to

2351. - delay :The voltage limits are identical as the current limits with the exception that the percentage iscalculated from parameter [0201].

2352. POWER (sum) - 1. limi t :The enable switch for this auxiliary limit:

• “OFF”: This limit is disabled.

• “LOW”: The limit is reached if the active power falls below the limit of parameter[2353].

• “HIGH”: The limit is reached if the active power is higher than the limit of parameter[2353].

• “REV-H”: The limit is reached if the reverse power is higher than the limit of parameter[2353].

• “CAP-H”: The limit is reached if the reactive cap. power is higher than the limit ofparameter [2353].

• “IND-H”: The limit is reached if the reactive ind. power is higher than the limit ofparameter [2353].

2353. - limit :The percentage is calculated from parameter [0202]. Event [2353] is activated if the actualvalue reaches this limit.

2354. - delay :This event is active if the limit is reached and the delay is passed.

2355. - 2. limit :to

2357. - delay :See the 1. Power limit

2358. FREQUENCY - 1. limi t :to

2363. - delay :The frequency limits are identical as the current or voltage limits with the exception that thepercentage is calculated from parameter [0203].



Service Manual


3.37 ANSI CW Contact wear measurement

The Contact wear measurement can be used to get a statistic supervision of the wear of thecontacts (due to switching operations) of a circuit breaker.

Figure 3-93 Contact wear measurement-1


Cont act wear measur ement↑

1942. - sw. cur r ent 4. l i mi t : 8300 kA1943. - cont act wear 1. l i mi t : 85. 50 %1944. - cont act wear 2. l i mi t : 87. 60 %1945. - cont act wear 3. l i mi t : 94. 35 %1946. - cont act wear 4. l i mi t : 97. 65 %1947. - swi t ch cycl es 1. l i mi t : 70001948. - swi t ch cycl es 2. l i mi t : 72001949. - swi t ch cycl es 3. l i mi t : 74001950. - swi t ch cycl es 4. l i mi t : 74801951. - mi n. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 1. 00 kA1952. - max. CO cycl es : 100001953. - 1. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 2. 00 kA

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 65500 kA0. 00- 650. 00 %

0. 00- 650. 00 %0. 00- 650. 00 %0. 00- 650. 00 %0- 655000- 655000- 655000- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA

BACK EXI T

Cont act wear measur ement

1930. Cont act wear measur ement : ON1931. - sumof sw. cur r ent L1 : 730 kA1932. - sumof sw. cur r ent L2 : 749 kA1933. - sumof sw. cur r ent L3 : 787 kA1934. - sum of cont act wear L1: 16. 42 %1935. - sum of cont act wear L2: 17. 38 %1936. - sum of cont act wear L3: 15. 29 %1937. - swi t chi ng cycl es : 8351938. - max swi t chi ng cycl es : 75001939. - sw. cur r ent 1. l i mi t : 7500 kA

1940. - sw. cur r ent 2. l i mi t : 7800 kA1941. - sw. cur r ent 3. l i mi t : 8000 kA

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ON0- 65500 kA0- 65500 kA0- 65500 kA0. 00- 650. 0 %0. 00- 650. 00 %0. 00- 650. 00 %0- 655000- 655000- 65500 kA0- 65500 kA0- 65500 kA

BACK EXI T



Service Manual






1954. - 1. max. CO cycl es : 45001955. - 2. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 3. 00 kA1956. - 2. max. CO cycl es : 30001957. - 3. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 4. 00 kA

1958. - 3. max. CO cycl es : 23001959. - 4. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 5. 00 kA1960. - 4. max. CO cycl es : 18001961. - 5. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 6. 00 kA1962. - 5. max. CO cycl es : 14501963. - 6. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 7. 00 kA1964. - 6. max. CO cycl es : 12001965. - 7. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 8. 00 kA

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA

0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA

BACK EXI T


1966. - 7. max. CO cycl es : 10001967. - 8. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 9. 00 kA1968. - 8. max. CO cycl es : 8501969. - 9. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 10. 00 kA1970. - 9. max. CO cycl es : 7401971. - 10. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 12. 00 kA1972. - 10. max. CO cycl es : 6001973. - 11. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 14. 00 kA

1974. - 11. max. CO cycl es : 4901975. - 12. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 16. 00 kA1976. - 12. max. CO cycl es : 4001977. - 13. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 18. 00 kA

↓

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA

0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA

BACK EXI T


1978. - 13. max. CO cycl es : 330

1979. - 14. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 20. 00 kA1980. - 14. max. CO cycl es : 2701981. - 15. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 22. 00 kA1982. - 15. max. CO cycl es : 2301983. - 16. swi t chi ng cur r ent : 24. 00 kA1984. - 16. max. CO cycl es : 1901985. - Ti meout count er CB op. : 800 ms1986. Temp/ curr ent supervi si on: OFF1987. - r ecor d cycl e t i me : 0 mi n1988. - curr ent average t i me : 0 mi n

Set t i ng r ange:

0- 65500

0. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000. 00- 650. 00 kA0- 655000- 65500 msOFF/ ON0- 60000 mi n0- 1440 mi n

BACK EXI T



Service Manual



1930. Contact wear measurement :The enable switch for this function

On every switching cycle (OFF->ON) of the circuit breaker, the actual phase currents are

measured and the contact wear for every phase is calculated (according to a curve, which can bedefined with 16 points). The values for the currents, the contact wear and the cycles are thenintegrated (summed) on the corresponding integrators (parameters [1931] to [1937]).

With the following parameters [1931] to [1937] initial values can be set. This can be usefull if theswitching equipment was already in use before this measurement is installed. Furthermore theseparameters are counting the related values during every switching process.

1931. - sum of sw. current L1 :to

1933. - sum of sw. current L3 :With these parameters initial values for the sum of the switching current for the threephases (L1-L3) can be set. Furthermore these parameters are counting the currents duringevery switching process.

1934. - sum of contact wear L1 :to

1936. - sum of contact wear L3 :With these parameters initial values for the sum of the contact wear for the three phases(L1-L3) can be set. Furthermore these parameters are counting the contact wear duringevery switching process.

1937. - switching cycles :With this parameter an initial value for the sum of the switching cycles can be set.Furthermore this parameter counts the cycle during every switching process.

1938. - max switching cycles :With this parameter a max. value for the sum of the switching cycles can be set.

With the parameters [1939] to [1950] supervision limits can be set. If a limit is reached thecorresponding event (event number = parameter number) will be activated. The events can beused to trigger an alarm or binary output. A limit can be disabled by setting the value to zero.

1939. - sw. current 1.limit :to

1942. - sw. current 4.limit :There are four limits available for the sum of the switching currents. A limit is active if one ofthe sum (parameters [1931] to [1933]) reaches the limit value.

NOTE: The values in the ∑I kA column in the Contact wear page will show “---” ifparameters [1939] to [1942] are all set to zero.

1943.- contact wear 1.limit :to

1946. - contact wear 4.limit :There are four limits available for the sum of the contact wear. A limit is active if one of thesum (parameters [1934] to [1936]) reaches the limit value.



Service Manual


1947. - switch cycles 1.limit :to

1950. - switch cycles 4.limit :There are four limits available for the sum of the switching cycles. A limit is active if the sum(parameter [1937]) reaches the limit value.

With the parameters [1951] to [1984] a curve for the calculation of the contact wear can be defined.During a switching cycle the contact wear of the circuit breaker will be calculated according to thiscurve. The curve is defined with one min. point and 16 points. Every point consists of one currentvalue and the related max. Closed-Open (CO) cycle for the current at this point. The contact wearis taken as the reciprocal value in percent of the max. CO cycles for that current.

1951. - min.switching current :1952.- max. CO cycles :

If the actual current is below this point the max. CO cycles remains the same. These twoparameters are mandatory and must be set.

1953. -1.switching current :1954.-1.max. CO cycles :

to1983. -16.switching current :1984.-16.max. CO cycles :

If the current is between two points the related max. CO cycles will be linearly interpolated.The points can be set in any order (the curve will sorted internally). A point will be only taken if at least one of the two values is greater zero. It is not mandatoryto set all the 16 points. If the actual current is greater than the last point than the relatedmax. CO cycles will be calculated continuously linear with a constant slope.

1985. -Timeout counter CB op. :

This parameter defines the timeout value for the current measurement from the moment theactual current is decreasing until the moment the circuit breaker opens.

1986.Temp/current supervision :1987. - record cycle time :1988. - current average time :

Detects the max. temperatures measured via the analogue inputs 1-3 over a given recordcycle time. The record cycle time can be set with parameter [1987]. The max. temperaturesare stored together with the corresponding feeder average phase currents L1-L3. Thecurrent average time (0...1440 min (max. 24 h)) can be set with parameter [1988]. Aftereach record cycle time the max. temperatures and the average currents of the last cycleare stored in the detailed protection history, and a new cycle will start. The average

currents are stored in the current phase fields, and the max. temperatures are stored in thevoltage phase fields of the detailed protection history.

Events:1986 TCS active: will be set constantly if parameter [1986] = ON.1987 TCS cycle : will be set for 1sec after each cycle time.

1989. - CB tr ip signal :In case that a circuit breaker OFF signal is available, this signal can be assigned to an binaryinput of SYMAP. This parameter defines the binary input which is connected to the breakerON signal. In case of breaker trip signal is recognized the actual current and voltagevalues(RMS) will be stored at that time in a separate memory. These values will be used forthe contact wear measurement.



Service Manual


3.38 ANSI FL Faul t Locator

The Fault Locator calculates the distance tot he fault location after any overcurrent protection trip.The calculation is initiatedeach time that the circuit breaker is switched of by any of the protectivefunctions ANSI 50, 50G, 51, 51G, und 67. Immediately prior to the protection trip all relevantcurrent and voltage values are saved. The fault location will be represented in the detailedprotection history subsequently to the evaluation of the measuring values.

Figure 3-98 ANSI FL Fault Locator


2390. Fault Locator :If the Fault Locator should be activated set it to “ON”, if not to “OFF”.

2391.-spec.line ind.X [mO/km] :This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific inductive resistanceX' (X' = L' 2 π f; with: specific inductance L' and frequency f) per unit length l (L' = L/l;

[mH/km] => X' = X/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a phase-to-phase loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheets of theconductor).

2392.-spec.line res.R [mO/km] :

This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific series resistance R' per unit length l (R' = R/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of aphase-to-phase loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheetsof the conductor).

2391.-gnd-loop ind.X[mOhm/km] :This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific inductive resistanceX' (X' = L' 2 π f; with: specific inductance L' and frequency f) per unit length l (L' = L/l;

[mH/km] => X' = X/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a phase-to-ground loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheets of theconductor).

2391.-gnd-loop res.R[mOhm/km] :This parameter is to register the characteristic quantity of the specific series resistance R' per unit length l (R' = R/l; [mOhm/km]) for a defined conductor length (line/cable) of a

Set t i ng r ange:

OFF/ ON0- 9999 mOhm/ km0- 9999 mOhm/ km0- 9999 mOhm/ km0- 9999 mOhm/ km

FL FAULT LOCATOR

2390. Faul t Locat or : OFF2391. - spec. l i ne i nd. X [ mO/ km] : 4502392. - spec. l i ne res. R [ mO/ km] : 3502393. - gnd- l oop i nd. X[ mOhm/ km] : 6502394. - gnd- l oop r es. R[ mOhm/ km] : 550

ZUR CK ENDE



Service Manual


phase-to-ground loop. The characteristic quantity is indicated of e.g. 1 km (see data sheetsof the conductor).



Service Manual


4 Alarm controller settings

The alarm controller has 79 independent free programmable alarm channels.

Figure 4-1 Alarm parameter mask


ALARM CHANNEL EVENT - Select :Selects an alarm channel for editing; up to 79 alarm channels can be used.

1. and 2. line :

This free programmable alarm text will appear on the alarm page if the alarm is active.

- mode :The following alarm modes are available:

• “OFF”: The alarm channel is disabled.

• “LATCHED”: The alarm event ([0001] to [0079]) is active until the alarm disappearsand the ACK-key is pressed.

• “UNLATCHED”: The alarm event ([0001] to [0079]) is active until the trigger event isactive.

• “NO ACK”: The alarm event ([0001] to [0079]) is active until the trigger event isactive. The alarm text in the LCD (also the beeper) disappearswithout ACK if the trigger event is not longer active.

- trigger :The alarm channel will be activated by this event.

- block by :The alarm channel is blocked if this event is active.

- delay :The alarm channel can be delayed with this time.

ALARM CHANNEL EVENT – Sel ect : 0006

- 1. l i ne: 06. ANSI 50- 12. l i ne: - I nst . 1. Overcur

- mode : UNLATCHED- t r i gger : 1402- bl ock by: 508- del ay 0. 7sec- 1. gr oup: 87- 2. gr oup: none- pr i or i ty: 2- opt i on : none- beeper : OFF

Set t i ng r ange: 1- 79

Max. 17 charactersMax. 17 charactersOFF, LATCHED, UNLATCHED, NO ACK0- 99990- 99990. 0- 999. 9 secnone, 80- 99none, 80- 99none, 1- 12none/ MODEM/ PRI NTER/ MODM+PRNTOFF/ ON

RELAY EXI T

LED CONTROL- ALARM : X- TRIP :

- red : X- amber :- green :

SYSTEM



Service Manual


Figure 4-2 shows the context of the trigger event, the block event, the delay and the ACK:

Figure 4-2 Alarm channel log ic

- 1. and 2. Group :Each alarm channel can be assigned to one or two alarm groups. If one of the alarmsbelonging to this group is active the corresponding group event will also be activated. Amaximum of twenty alarm groups (80-99) can be created.

- priority :

NOTE: Only for SYMAP® devices equipped with power management!

Through the priority settings, useful attributes can be set to the corresponding alarmchannels. Additional operations such as “change to manual mode,” “start the next diesel” or“stop own aggregate” will activated after the alarm appears. Table 4-1 shows all alarmpriorities and the corresponding operations that are activated after appearance of the alarm.

Table 4-1 Alarm controller

Operation after the alarm appears Alarm pr iori ty

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Change to manual mode X X X X X X X X X

Start next stand-by engine X X X X X X X X X

Immediately Stop X X

Normal Stop XImmediately Stop after started engine tries tosynchronize

X

Normal Stop after next C.B. is closed X

Only open Breaker* after started engine tries tosynchronize

X

Only open Breaker* with load reduction after next C.B. is closed

X

Set the start valve max trials parameter [0632] to10 and the cooling down time parameter [0656] to600.0 sec

X

Normal Stop after next C.B. is closed,but without parameter [0651] (ALARM DELAY –max time)

X

Normal Stopwithout load reduction after started engine tries tosynchronize

X

* means Shunt #1 output

- option :

• “NONE”: No action when the alarm appears

• “MODEM”: The alarm will be sent automatically over a modem (if available).

• “PRINTER”: The alarm will be sent automatically to a printer over Serial port 2.

• “MODEM+PRINT”: The alarm will be sent automatically over a modem and to a

printer.

SR

ACK

trigger event&

block eventS

R Q

delay

alarm active



Service Manual


- beeper :

• “OFF”: No sound when the alarm appears

• “ON”: When the alarm appears the beeper will be active until the ACK-key ispressed.

NOTE: There is a special beeper event [2918] which can be used to drive external signaldevices over a binary output.

LED CONTROL . The LED control box defines the action of the alarm LEDs if the alarm occurs:

• “ALARM”: The main alarm LED will be activated.

• “TRIP”: The trip LED will be activated.

• “red, amber, green”: (“green”: only SYMAP® BC/BCG): The multi-colored LEDs left ofthe LCD screen (where the alarm text is shown) will be activated.If more than one color is marked the LED will blink alternately in

these colors.

Figure 4-3 shows the context of the latched and unlatched conditions of the alarm channel.

Alarm trigger event

Alarm channel event

Alarm output

Beeper

Acknowledgement

UNLATCHED

Alarm trigger event

Alarm channel event

Alarm output

Beeper

Acknowledgement

LATCHED

Alarm trigger event

Alarm channel event

Alarm output

Beeper

Acknowledgement

LATCHED

Figure 4-3 Context of the latched and unlatched conditions of the alarm channel

The “alarm trigger event” is the event number which activates the alarm channel. The “alarmchannel event” will be active as long as the alarm is acknowledged. If the “alarm channel event ” islinked to a binary output this output will be activated in accordance to the “latched/unlatched”



Service Manual


condition set within the alarm channel settings. The “beeper” will be activated by the “alarm triggerevent” and reset after alarm acknowledgement.

NOTE: There is a special event [2936], which becomes active if a new alarm occurs. After thatthis event can be reset with ACK.



Service Manual


5 Special parameters

This parameter group comprises some special parameters which are only accessible through thePC – Parameter Tool (Button: EXTRAS > Special parameter ).

Table 5-1 Special parameters

No. Name Default Unit Range

DISPLAY FILTER

[0074] Deadband filter 2.5 % 0.0-20.0[0075] Frequency filter 20000 mHz/sec 0-65535[0090] FILTER -RPM nominal/dt 10.0 sec 0.0-999.9[0091] - analog inputs 10.0 sec 0.0-999.9[0092] - PT 100 60.0 sec 0.0-6553.5

BINARY INPUTS

[0055] Wirefault limit 20 LSB 0-255[0084] Oscillation limit 150 n/sec 0-65535

COMMUNICATION

[0054] SERIAL PORT1 -Stopbits 1 - 1-2

[0057] MODBUS FC3 Byte count 1 - 1-2LOCAL/REMOTE MODE

[0078] Select breaker mode Loc/Rem - none…Test…Loc/Rem[0088] Change to TEST mode MANUAL - MANUAL…AUTOM.

SPECIAL PARAMETER

[0060] Current direction(gen.) forward - forward…reverse[0082] Select extension board none - none…CMA218[0058] Analog inp.4-add. low limit 0.0 - 0.0-6553.5

CALIBRATION PARAMETER

[0032] Uaux CAL. -X3/ 1, 2 100.0 % 0.0-999.9[0033] Shunt1 CAL.-X2.1/18,19 100.0 % 0.0-999.9[0034] Shunt2 CAL.-X2.1/20,21 100.0 % 0.0-999.9


0074. Deadband fil ter :This parameter is valid for all measure data which are outputted over the LCD, theanalogous outputs and which are transferred through all communication ports. If any valuefalls below the setted deadband limit the value will be reset to zero.Furthermore, if the changing of any value is below the deadband limit the average builder(parameter [0111], see chapter 2.2) will plane the value.

0075. Frequency fi lter :This parameter filters the Gen., BUS1 and 2 frequencies. Only frequency changes belowthe set value (in mHz/sec) are accepted by the measuring system.

0090. FILTER -RPM nominal/dt :

NOTE: This parameter is only valid for SYMAP® XG/BCG (power management)!

With this parameter the measuring system builds an average of the diesel speed.

0091. FILTER - analog inputs :With this parameter the measuring system builds an average of the analog inputs values,except the PT 100 inputs (see chapter 2.5).

0092. FILTER - PT 100 :

With this parameter the measuring system linearly integrates the PT100 inputs (see chapter2.5.1). The integration time can be set with parameter [0092] (360°C jump in ? sec). Theintegrator will be initialised with the actual value at “Power ON” or with the F2-key on theanalog inputs page (the key appears if parameter [0092] > 3.0 sec).



Service Manual


0055. Wirefault limit :If the measured LSB value of a binary input falls below this limit wirefault is detected (seechapter 2.6).

0084. Oscillation limit :If the changing of a binary input per seconds exceeds this limit system fail [3012] will be

activated (see Appendix A2). The supervision can be disabled by setting this parameter tozero.

0054. SERIAL PORT 1 – stopbi ts :With this parameter the number of stopbits (1 or 2) in the transferred bytes through serialport 1 can be adjust (see chapter 2.4).

0057. MODBUS FC3 Byte count :With this parameter the number of bytes (1 or 2) of the byte count field in function code 3 ofthe MODBUS protocol can be adjust (see Appendix A1).

0078. Select breaker mode :

With this parameter the operating (breaker) modes for the device can be selected (seechapter 2.5 in the Users manual). The following modes are available:

• “none”: no modes selected; this can be used for SYMAP® XG/BCG, because forPower management usually only the AUTO/MANU. modes are used.

• “Loc/Rem”: The valid modes are “Local” and “Remote”.

• “Test”: The valid modes are “Local”, “Remote”, “Test Local” and “Test Remote”.

0088. Change to TEST mode :If this parameter is setted to AUTOM. and parameter [0078] to “Test” the device will switchautomatically to the test mode (“Test Local” or “Test Remote”) if one breaker changes the

position from IN->OUT (see chapter 2.5 in the User ′s manual). 0060. Current direction (gen.) :

This parameter defines the direction of the generator current.

0082. Select extension board :This parameter enables the software for various extension boards.

0058. Analog input 4 - additional low limit :With this parameter the user has the possibility to set an additional low limit for analog input4 (see chapter 2.5). The limit is disabled if the setted value equals zero. If the valuereaches this low limit, event [2935] will be set.

0032. Uaux CAL. :This parameter calibrates the Uaux measure input (see chapter 3.32).

0033. Shunt #1 CAL. :This parameter calibrates the Shunt #1 measure input (see chapter 3.32).

0034. Shunt #2 CAL. :This parameter calibrates the Shunt #2 measure input (see chapter 3.32).



Service Manual


6 Maintenance, Servic ing and Retesting

The devices of SYMAP® product line were designed numerically. All functions base on testedhardware and software.

Maintenance All SYMAP® devices are maintenance-free. However, there are some certain, life-limitedcomponents, which causes replacement according to the given replacement cycles listed in thetable below. Following components are to be considered:

• Akku, Type ML2430; for storage of data in the RAM memory. The buffering time of a fullycharged accumulator (stand-by operation) is about 50 days. Manufacturer’s warranted lifetime of the accumulator is about 10 years.

• Battery, Type CR2032, for maintenance of counting date and time. The buffering time of afully charged battery is about 50 days.

Table 6-1 Life-limited components

Component Type Function Failure consequences Replacementcycle

Replacement

AkkuML2430,solderingtag

Storage of data in theRAM memory

Loss of data aftercomplete discharge ofthe akkumulator

ca.every10 years

StuckeElektronikGmbH

BatteryCR2032,solderingtag

Maintenance ofcounting date and timeafter disconnecting

SYMAP®

power supply

Reset of date and timeto default values aftercomplete discharge ofthe battery

ca.every10 years

StuckeElektronikGmbH

Servicing All SYMAP® devices provide extensive self supervision functions for signalling different internal

faults. Replacement of the life-limited components (see table above) may be undertaken onlyunder ESD-conform conditions at the device manufacturer’s facility.

Retesting A repeating secondary test is mainly to check the function of the hardware including the wiring on aregular basis. Moreover, any non-documented changes of parameter settings can be detected.

Retesting intervalls are to be allocated by the user. All repeated tests for functionality checks assimplified functionality tests and secondary protection tests as complete check of the protectionsystem fall in the scope of the regulation, which apply to valid standards for the plant area requiringthe use of SYMAP® devices.



Service Manual




Service Manual




Service Manual

Documents

Bay Controller - Stucke Elektronik - SYMAP - Service Manual 795